ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED COLLEGES

REGULATIONS 2021

B. TECH. HANDLOOM AND TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:

Bachelor of Handloom and Textile Technology curriculum is designed to prepare the

undergraduates to
1. Have attitude and knowledge for the successful professional and technical career
2. Have strong foundation in basic sciences, engineering, management,
mathematics andcomputational platforms
3. Have knowledge on the theory and practices in the field of h a n d lo o m a n d
textile manufacturing technology and allied areas
4. Engross in life-long learning to keep themselves abreast of new developments,
and practice and inspire high ethical values and technical standards

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

The Handloom and Textile Technology Graduates will have the ability to

1. Apply knowledge of mathematics, sciences, engineering and textile technology to

get solution for the technological problems in handloom and textile industry
2. Identify, formulate, review literature and critically analyze the technological problems
in the handloom and textile industry to reach substantiated conclusion
3. Design and develop the solutions to the technological and managerial problems in
handloom and textile industry with appropriate consideration for the public health
and safety, and the cultural,societal, and environmental considerations
4. Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions to the technological problems in handloom and textile
industry

1
 5. Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools for managing handloom and textile manufacturing
companies with an understanding of the limitations
6. Apply reasoning gained through the contextual knowledge to assess societal,
health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant
to the profession
7. Understand the impact of the developed solutions in societal and environmental
contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge for sustainable development
8. Understand ethical and professional responsibilities
9. Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams in
the profession
10. Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large. Able to comprehend and write effective reports
and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
11. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a
team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments
12. Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES:

The Handloom and Textile Technology Graduates will have the ability to
1. Understand and apply fundamental and the technical knowledge for managing
handloom and textile manufacturing industry
2. Be a successful entrepreneur and designer in handloom fabrics and textile clothing.
3. Design and develop novel products and manufacturing processes in handloom and
textile fields

2
 PEO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PSO

PEO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

I 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 2

II 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1

III 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 2

IV 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 3 2 2 2

3
Year Semeste PO PSO
r Course Name
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
SCIENCES INCLUDING
MANAGEMENT COURSES
I I Professional English - I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
I II Professional English - II 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils
தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் /
Tamils and Technology
Basic Science Courses [BSC] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
I Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
I Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
I Engineering Chemistry 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
I 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
II Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
IV Environmental Science and Sustainability *2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
III Probability and Statistical Methods 3 3 3 2 1.2 0.8 0 0.2 0 0 1.2 1.2 1.6 1.2 1.6
ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSE [ESC] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
I Problem Solving and Python Programming 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
I Problem Solving and Python
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Programming Laboratory
II Basic Electrical, Electronics and
2 1 1 1 - - -
Instrumentation Engineering
II Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
II Engineering Practices Laboratory 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
II Basic Electrical, Electronics and
1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
Instrumentation Engineering Laboratory
PROFESSIONAL CORE COURSES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
[PCC]

4
III Handloom Weaving Technology 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
III Technology of Pre-Spinning
2.8 2.8 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
Process
III Preparatory process for woven Fabric
3 3 3 2.28 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2.71
Manufacture
III Structure and Properties of Textile Fibres 3 3 2.28 3 2 - 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 2
III Production of Textile Fibres 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3
III Pre Spinning Laboratory 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
III Handloom Weaving Laboratory 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 3 1 3
IV 2.28
Technology of Yarn Spinning 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 1.28
IV Technology of woven Fabric Manufacture 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
IV Knitting Technology 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
IV Chemical Processing of Textile Materials I 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
IV Fabric Structure I 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
IV Fabric Manufacture Laboratory 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
IV Fabric Structure Analysis Laboratory 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
V Testing of Textile Materials 3 3 2 3 2 - - 2 - - - 1 3 1 2
V Fabric Structure II 3 2.17 3 1 1 - 1 - 2 1.16 2 2 3 3 3
V Testing of Textile Materials Laboratory 3 2.17 3 1 1 - 1 - 2 1.16 2 2 3 3 3
V Textile Design and CAD Laboratory
3 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 3
VI Chemical Processing of Textile Material II 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2

5
VI Technology of Nonwoven 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
VI Textile Chemical Processing Laboratory 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 3 1 2.33
VI Textile Product Engineering Laboratory 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
VI Apparel and Home Furnishings 2.28 2.28
3 1.57 2.28 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 1.28 2.28
Manufacturing
VI Financial Management for Textile
3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
Industries
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES [PEC]
Process and Quality Control in Spinning 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Process and Quality Control in Fabric
3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Manufacture
Theory of Drafting and Twisting 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Production and application of sewing
3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
threads
Textile Chemicals and Auxiliaries 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2

Garment Production Machinery 2.5 2.2 1.14 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3

7 8
Industrial Engineering in Garment Industry 1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
Pattern Engineering 2 2 2 - 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1
Apparel Marketing and Merchandising - 1 2.6 2 2 1 1 2.4 2 1.2 1 - 2 2 2
Apparel Product Development Laboratory 1.33 - - - - - 1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 3 2 1
3 3 3
Basic Sewing and Pattern Making - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
Laboratory
Apparel Costing 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1
Operations Research in Textile Industry 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
Supply Chain Management 1 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 2 2 1
Apparel Costing 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
6
 Textile and Apparel EXIM Management 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
Management of Textile Effluents
Technical Textiles 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
Medical Textiles 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
Smart Textiles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Protective Textiles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Coated Textiles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
Home Textile 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
Characterization of Textile Polymers 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
Clothing Comfort 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
Textile Reinforced Composites 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
Advances in Textile Printing and Finishes
Advanced Testing of Textiles 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
COURSES (EEC)
IV Internship /Training I 3 3 2 2.6 2.8 2 2 2.1 2.1 3 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.8 2.4
V Summer internship 3 3 2 2.6 2.8 2 2 2.1 2.1 3 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.8 2.4
VII Summer internship 3 3 2 2.6 2.8 2 2 2.1 2.1 3 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.8 2.4
VIII Project Work / Internship 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3

1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation

7
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)
B. TECH. HANDLOOM AND TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR FOR I TO VIII SEMESTERS
SEMESTER I
CREDITS
CATE- PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT
No. CODE
GORY PERIODS
L T P
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English - I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Problem Solving and Python
6. GE3151 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICALS
Problem Solving and Python
8. GE3171 ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. BS3171 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
10. GE3172 English Laboratory $ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
SI. PERIODS TOTAL
COURSE CATE- PERWEEK
NO COURSETITLE CONTACT CREDITS
CODE GORY
. L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English - II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA3251 Statistics and Numerical Methods BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. PH3257 Physics for Textile Technologists BSC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Basic Electrical, Electronics and
BE3252 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Instrumentation Engineering
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
6. CY3252 Chemistry for Textile
BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologists
7. GE3252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் /
HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
Tamils and Technology
8. NCC Credit Course Level 1# - 2 0 0 2 2
PRACTICALS
9. GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
10. Basic Electrical, Electronics and
BE3272 Instrumentation ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
11. Communication Laboratory /
GE3272 EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Foreign Language $
TOTAL 17 1 16 34 26
#NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
$ Skill Based Course

8
 SEMESTER III
PERIODS
PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
PERIODS
L T P
THEORY
1. MA3357 Probability and Statistical
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Methods
2. HT3301 Handloom Weaving
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
3. TT3354 Technology of Pre-Spinning
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Process
4. TT3351 Preparatory process for
PCC 3 0 2 5 4
woven Fabric Manufacture
5. TT3353 Structure and Properties of
PCC 3 0 2 5 4
Textile Fibres
6. TT3352 Production of Textile Fibres PCC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. TT3361 Pre Spinning Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
8. HT3311 Handloom Weaving
PCC 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
9. GE3361 Professional Development$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 18 1 11 30 24.5
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TT3454 Technology of Yarn Spinning PCC 3 0 2 5 4
2. TT3453 Technology of woven Fabric
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacture
3. TT3452 Knitting Technology PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. TT3451 Chemical Processing of
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Textile Materials I
5. HT3401 Fabric Structure I PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. TT3461 Fabric Manufacture PCC
0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
9. TT3462 Fabric Structure Analysis PCC
0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
10. HT3512 Industrial Training/Internship EEC
I* 0 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 17 0 8 25 21

# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
*Two weeks industrial training/internship carries one credit. Industrial training/internship during IV Semester
Summer Vacation will be evaluated in V semester

9
 SEMESTER V
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TT3591 Testing of Textile Materials PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. HT3501 Fabric Structure II PCC 3 0 2 5 4
3. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Mandatory Course-I* MC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
7. TT3581 Testing of Textile Materials
PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
8. HT3511 Textile Design and CAD PCC
0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
9. HT3512 Industrial Training/Internship I* EEC 0 0 0 0 1
TOTAL 18 0 7 25 19.5
& Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-I)
*Two weeks industrial training/internship carries one credit. Industrial training/internship during IV Semester
Summer Vacation will be evaluated in V semester
SEMESTER VI
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TT3651 Chemical Processing of Textile
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Material II
2. TT3691 Technology of Nonwoven PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Mandatory Course-II& MC 3 0 0 3 0
8. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
9. TT3661 Textile Chemical Processing
PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
10. TT3611 Textile Product Engineering PCC 0 0 3 3
1.5
Laboratory
11. HT3711 Industrial Training/ Internship
EEC 0 0 0 0 0
II##
TOTAL 21 0 6 27 21
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
##
Two weeks industrial training/internship carries one credit. Industrial training/Internship during VI Semester
Summer Vacation will be evaluated in VII semester
& Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC- II)
# NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be

recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.

10
 SEMESTER VII/VIII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TT3751 Apparel and Home
PCC 3 0 2 5 4
Furnishings Manufacture
2. TT3752 Financial Management for
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Textile Industries
3. GE3791 Human values and Ethics HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
4. Elective – Management# HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. HT3711 Industrial Training/ Internship
EEC 0 0 0 0 1
II##
TOTAL 20 0 2 22 22
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII.
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes
# Elective- Management shall be chosen from the Elective Management courses
##Two weeks industrial training/internship carries one credit. Industrial training/Internship during VI Semester

Summer Vacation will be evaluated in VII semester

SEMESTER VIII/VII#
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. HT3811
Project Work / Internship# EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII.
#
15 weeks of continuous Internship in an organization carries 10 credits.
TOTAL CREDITS: 166

ELECTIVE – MANAGEMENT COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PERWEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GE3751 Principles of Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. GE3752 Total Quality Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. GE3753 Engineering Economics HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
and Financial Accounting
4. GE3754 Human Resource HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. GE3755 Knowledge Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3792 Industrial Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3

11
 MANDATORY COURSES I

PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management

MANDATORY COURSES II

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with MC 3 0 0 3 0
Traditional Practices -
Yoga, Ayurveda and
Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic MC 3 0 0 3 0
Thought for a Humane
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0

12
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS

Vertical I Vertical III

Vertical II Vertical IV
Spinning, Weaving Management Vertical V
Garment Technical
and chemical of Textile Advancements
Manufacturing Textiles
processing Industries in textiles
Process and Quality Garment Production Operations Technical Characterization
Control in Spinning Machinery Research in Textiles of Textile
Textile Polymers
Industry
Process and Quality Industrial Engineering Supply Chain Medical Clothing
Control in Fabric in Garment Industry Management Textiles Comfort
Manufacture
Theory of Drafting Pattern Making Apparel Home Textile
and Twisting Costing Textiles Reinforced
Composites
Production and Apparel Marketing and Textile and Smart High
application of sewing Merchandising Apparel EXIM Textiles Performance
threads Management Fibres

Structural Mechanics Apparel Product Enterprise Protective Advanced

of Yarns and Fabrics Development Resource Textiles Testing of
Laboratory Planning for Textiles
Apparel
Industry
Textile Chemicals Basic Sewing and Management Coated Advances in
and Auxiliaries Pattern Making of Textile Textiles Textile Printing
Laboratory Effluents and Finishes

Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:

Professional Elective Courses will be registered in Semesters V and VI. These courses are listed in groups
called verticals that represent a particular area of specialisation. Students are permitted to choose all
Professional Electives from a particular vertical or from different verticals. Further, only one Professional
Elective course shall be chosen in a semester horizontally (row-wise). However, two courses are permitted
from the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and another in semester VI.
The registration of courses for B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree shall be done from Semester V to
VIII. The procedure for registration of courses explained above shall be followed for the courses of
B.E/B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree also. For more details on B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree
refer to Regulations 2021 Clause 4.10 (Amendments).

13
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS

VERTICAL 1: SPINNING, WEAVING AND CHEMICAL PROCESSING

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CTT343 Process and Quality PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control in Spinning
2. CTT342 Process and Quality PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control in Fabric
Manufacture
3. CTT353 Theory of Drafting and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Twisting
4. CTT344 Production and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
application of sewing
threads
5. CTT357 Structural Mechanics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
of Yarns and Fabrics
6. CTT351 Textile Chemicals and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Auxiliaries

VERTICAL 2: GARMENT MANUFACTURING

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CTT337 Garment Production PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Machinery
2. FT3692 Industrial Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
in Garment
Manufacturing
3. FT3404 Pattern Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3

4. FT3691 Apparel Marketing PEC 3 0 0 3 3

and Merchandising
5. CTT362 Apparel Product PEC 0 0 6 6 3
Development
Laboratory
6. CTT361 Basic Sewing and PEC 0 0 6 6 3
Pattern Making
Laboratory

14
 VERTICAL 3: MANAGEMENT OF TEXTILE INDUSTRIES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CTT341 Operations Research PEC 3 0 0 3 3
in Textile Industry
2. CTT347 Supply Chain PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CTT336 Enterprise Resource PEC 0 0 6 6 3
Planning for Garment
Industry
4. CTT354 Apparel Costing PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CTT355 Management of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Textile Effluents
6. CTT356 Textile and Apparel PEC 3 0 0 3 3
EXIM Management

VERTICAL 4: TECHNICAL TEXTILES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK CONTACT
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CTT348 Technical Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CTT340 Medical Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3

3. CTT339 Home Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3

4. CTT346 Smart Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3

5. CTT345 Protective Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3

6. CTT335 Coated Textiles PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 5: ADVANCEMENTS IN TEXTILES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK CONTACT
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CTT333 Characterization of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Textile Polymers
2. CTT334 Clothing Comfort PEC 3 0 0 3 3

3. CTT352 Textile Reinforced PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Composites
4. CTT338 High Performance PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fibres
5. CTT331 Advanced Testing of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Textiles
6. CTT332 Advances in Textile PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Printing and Finishes

15
 ‘

OPEN ELECTIVES
Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not similar to
any other course contents/title under other course categories.

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
2. OCS352 IoT Concepts and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Applications
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS333 Augmented Reality / Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Competitive
Examinations
2. OCE353 Lean Concepts, Tools OEC 3 0 0 3 3
And Practices
3. OMG352 NGOs and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainable
Development
4. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
5. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
6. OME354 Applied Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Thinking
7. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. OPR351 Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
9. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vehicle
10. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OSF351 Fire Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3

16
 Engineering
14. OML351 Introduction to non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
destructive testing
15. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. ORA351 Foundation of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Robotics
17. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical
engineering
18. OGI351 Remote Sensing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Concepts
19. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OEN351 Drinking Water Supply OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Treatment
21. OEE352 Electric Vehicle OEC 3 0 0 3 3
technology
22. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
23. OFD352 Traditional Indian OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Foods
24. OFD353 Introduction to food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
processing
25. OPY352 IPR for Pharma OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Industry
26. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. OPE351 Introduction to OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Petroleum Refining
and Petrochemicals
29. CPE334 Energy Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Management
30. OPT351 Basics of Plastics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing
31. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
32. OEC352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Electronic Devices and
Circuits
33. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Integrated Product
Development
34. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OMA353 Algebra and Number OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Theory
37. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
39. OBT353 Basics of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Biomolecules
40. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Molecular Biology
17
 OPEN ELECTIVES – IV

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OCE354 Basics of Integrated OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Water Resources
Management
3. OMA355 Advanced Numerical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
4. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. OMA357 Queuing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Reliability Modelling
6. OMG354 Production and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Operations
Management for
Entrepreneurs
7. OMG355 Multivariate Data OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analysis
8. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. CME343 New Product OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
10. OME355 Industrial Design & OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Rapid Prototyping
Techniques
11. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
12. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
13. AU3002` Batteries and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management system
14. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17. OIM353 Production Planning OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Control
18. OIE353 Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
19. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OSF353 Chemical Process OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Safety
21. OML352 Electrical, Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Magnetic
materials
22. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
applications
23. OMR352 Hydraulics and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Pneumatics
24. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18
 Robots
26. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OMV351 Marine Merchant OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vessels
28. OMV352 Elements of Marine OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
29. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. OGI352 Geographical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Information System
31. OAI352 Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
Development
32. OEN352 Biodiversity OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Conservation
33. OEE353 Introduction to control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
systems
34. OEI354 Introduction to OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Industrial Automation
Systems
35. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
36. OFD355 Food safety and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Quality Regulations
37. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OPE353 Industrial safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OPE354 Unit Operations in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Petro Chemical
Industries
42. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
43. OPT353 Properties and Testing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
of Plastics
44. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
45. CBM370 Wearable devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
46. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. OBT355 Biotechnology for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Waste Management
48. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. OBT357 Biotechnology in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Health Care

19
 SUMMARY

Name of the Programme

Subject Area Credits per Semester Total

S.No
Credits
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1 HSMC 4 3 5 12
2 BSC 12 10 4 2 28
3 ESC 5 11 16
4 PCC 19.5 19 9.5 9 7 64
5 PEC 9 9 18
6 OEC 3 9 12
7 EEC 1 2 1 1 1 10 16

Non-Credit
8 √ √
/(Mandatory)

Total 22 26 24.5 21 19.5 21 22 10 166

20
 Enrollment for B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) / Minor degree (Optional)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for
the award of B.E./B.Tech. (Honours) Minor degree.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester V
onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other
programmes, Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the
following verticals also.
Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.
VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE (IN ADDITIONS TO ALL THE VERTICALS OF OTHER
PROGRAMMES)
Vertical IV
Vertical I Vertical III Business Vertical V
Vertical II
Fintech and Public Data Environment and
Entrepreneurship
Block Chain Administration Analytics Sustainability

Financial Foundations of Principles of Statistics For Sustainable

Management Entrepreneurship Public Management infrastructure
Administration Development
Fundamentals Team Building & Constitution of Datamining Sustainable
of Investment Leadership India For Business Agriculture and
Management for Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Creativity & Public Human Sustainable Bio
Financial Innovation in Personnel Resource Materials
Services and Entrepreneurship Administration Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Administrative Marketing Materials for Energy
Blockchain Marketing Theories And Social Sustainability
and its Management For Media Web
Applications Business Analytics

Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation Green Technology

Personal Management for Administrative And Supply
Finance and Entrepreneurs System Chain
Payments Analytics

Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental

Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Quality Monitoring
and Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable
Development

21
(Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

SL PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
N GORY
PERIODS
O. L T P
1. CMG331 Financial Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Services and Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Finance and Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to Fintech PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
PERIODS
L T P
1. CMG337 Foundations of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneruship
2. CMG338 Team Building &
Leadership
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
3. CMG339 Creativity & Innovation
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
in Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of Marketing
Management For PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. CMG342 Financing New
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures

22
 VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG343 Principles of Public
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMG345 Public Personnel
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMG347 Indian Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. CMG348 Public Policy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG349 Statistics For
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining For Business PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing And Social
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation And Supply
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK CONTACT
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CES331 Sustainable infrastructure
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainable Development

23
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the
institution. Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.

The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying
values are needed.”

“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable,
allow them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them
work for excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students,
give a broader view of life, and build character. “

Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self,
people around them, society at large, and nature.

The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.

(i) Physical Activity

This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.

(ii) Creative Arts

Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a
sense of aesthetics and
also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.

(iii) Universal Human Values

This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself
and allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with
courage, be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and
department, be sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base.
Methodology of teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and
dont's, but get students to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught
through group discussions and real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty mentor each.
It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for the student for
the full duration of the UG programme.

(iv) Literary Activity

Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.

(v) Proficiency Modules

24
This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the
students exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
(vii) Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.
(ix) Department Specific Activities
About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of Engineering /
Technology/ Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building things
(become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop. For
example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational thinking,
and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple circuits
as an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build stuff
using their knowledge of science.

Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be
no tests / assessments during this programme.

References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE

HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand
their meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work? What are the seven C’s of effective communication?
What are key language skills? What is effective listening? What does it involve? What is effective
speaking? What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to do? What is
effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills? What does the
course focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this
course? What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and
communication skills to get the best out of this course?

25
INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8
Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense ( simple and progressive); Question types: Wh/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and
travel & technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event
(field trip etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions.
Vocabulary - Word forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communcation ( tables, pie
charts etc,. ). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.

UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or
narrative). Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and
Simple, Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs
Function words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To use appropriate words in a professional context
 To gain understanding of basic grammatical structures and use them in right context.
 To read and interpret information presented in tables, charts and other graphic forms
 To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of
English, Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr.
KN. Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India)
Pvt. Ltd.
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
26
 4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS LTPC

3 1 04
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.

UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by
orthogonal transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal
transformation – Nature of quadratic forms – Applications : Stretching of an elastic membrane.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules
(sum, product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation -
Applications : Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.

27
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration : Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications : Hydrostatic force
and pressure, moments and centres of mass.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals – Applications : Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 : Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2 : Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3 : Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO4 : Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5 : Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons,
th
10 Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
44th Edition , 2018.
3. James Stewart, " Calculus : Early Transcendentals ", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems
only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net
change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].

REFERENCES :
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain . R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K., “ Calculus " Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., " Higher Engineering Mathematics ", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, " Engineering Mathematics " Oxford University Press,
2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, " Thomas Calculus ", 14th Edition, Pearson India,
2018.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

28
PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.

UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multi-particle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM –
kinetic energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational
kinetic energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies –
M.I of a diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular
momentum – rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum
– double pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on
the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave -
sound waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection -
interference –Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser -
characteristics - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population
inversion - Nd-YAG laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.
UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger
equation (Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function -
Normalization –Free particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes-
Normalization, probabilities and the correspondence principle.

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1 : Understand the importance of mechanics.
CO2 : Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
CO3 : Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
CO4 : Understand the importance of quantum physics.
CO5 : Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy
bands.

29
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian
Edition), 2009.
2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag,
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

CY3151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and
applications of energy conversion and storage devices.

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-color,
odour, turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, flouride and arsenic. Municipal
water treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
Desalination of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler
corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Priming &foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal
treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment
– Ion exchange demineralization and zeolite process.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
30
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine,
agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.

UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9

Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water
system; Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis;
Two component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials
(Polymer matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes
and whiskers). Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix
composites and Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and
ultimate), Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum
and Diesel: Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel
oil - cetane number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon foot print.

UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy; Nuclear energy: light water nuclear
power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications of solar
cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal energy; Batteries:
Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery and lithium-ion-
battery; Electric vehicles; working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial fuel cell;
Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
CO1 :To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable
treatment methodologies to treat water.
CO2 :To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in
designing the synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology
applications.
CO3 :To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection
requirements.
CO4 :To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
CO5 :To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable
application in energy sectors.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A Text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition,
2018.

31
REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of
nanoscience and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and
Materials Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
● To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
● To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
● To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
● To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building
blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow
chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing
algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list
of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string
slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative

32
programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary
search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting,
histogram, Students marks statement, Retail bill preparation.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press , 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

33
GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு LTPC
1 001
அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3
இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி –
தமிழ் தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன்மம –
ெங் க இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள்
– தமிழ் க் கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் -
பக்தி இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் –
தமிழில் நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில்
பொரதியொர் மற் றும் பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.

அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர –
சிற் பக் கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப்பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் –
ெங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும்
இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.

அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
34
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC

1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam
Literature - Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism
in Tamil Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development
of Modern literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.

UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam
Literature - Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities
and Ports of Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of
Cholas.

UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the
other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems
of Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
35
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L TPC

0 04 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world
problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted to the
sample experiments listed here.
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and
developing flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight
of a motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit,
etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of
list & tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)

36
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems..
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press , 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

37
BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY: (Any Seven Experiments)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise
manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of
experimental data.
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of
regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1 : Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
CO2 : Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
CO3 : Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing
physical reality.
CO4 : Access, process and analyze scientific information.
CO5 : Solve problems individually and collaboratively.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
 Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

38
 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments )
OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters,
such as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample
using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation
titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUT COMES :
 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness
and DO.
 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
 To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
 To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques
TEXT BOOKS :
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook
of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
.
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

39
GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF

COMMUNICATION 6
Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and
interviews with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about
current and temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and
feelings- engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking –
Small Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about
positions and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about
transportation-

UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic texts information
 To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
 To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
 To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking

40
  End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH -II L T P C

2 00 2
OBJECTIVES :
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in professional
context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements

UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6



Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email
etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases

UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6

Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds
UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6
Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the
Editor, Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Error correction; If
conditional sentences

UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6

Reading –Newspaper articles; Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey
Report Grammar – Reported Speech, Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of prepositions

41
UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6
Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar –
Numerical adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
 To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical
texts
 To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the
written format.
 To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
 To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001,
NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

42
MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and
numerical methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems
occurring in engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which
plays an important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering
and technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary
differential equations.

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and
small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for
goodness of fit – Independence of attributes.

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design
– Latin square design - 22 factorial design.

UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton
Raphson method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting -
Gauss Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a
matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.

UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods:
Milne’s and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential
equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
 Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
 Understandthe knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

43
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and
Statistics ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

PH3257 PHYSICS FOR TEXTILE TECHNOLOGISTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students effectively to understand the basics of crystallography and crystal
imperfections.
 To enable the students to get knowledge on ferrous and nonferrous alloys.
 To impart knowledge on the basics of ceramics, composites and nanomaterials.
 To learn about mechanical properties of materials.
 To introduce the concept of light - matter interactions and electro-optical effects.

UNIT I CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 9
Crystal structures: Crystal lattice – basis - unit cell and lattice parameters – crystal systems and
Bravais lattices – Structure and packing fractions of SC, BCC, FCC, diamond cubic, NaCl, ZnS
structures – crystal planes, directions and Miller indices – distance between successive planes –
linear and planar densities – crystalline and noncrystalline materials –Example use of Miller
indices: wafer surface orientation – wafer flats and notches – pattern alignment - imperfections in
crystals.

UNIT II FERROUS AND NONFERROUS ALLOYS 9

The Fe-Fe3C phase diagram: phases, invariant reactions,development of microstructure in
eutectoid, hypoeutectoid and hypereutectoid alloys–influence of other alloying elements in the Fe-
44
C system - phase transformations –isothermal transformation diagram for eutectoid iron-carbon
alloy – microstructures: pearlite, bainite, spheroidite and martensite – steels, stainless steels and
cast irons – copper alloys – aluminum alloys – titanium alloys.

UNIT III CERAMICS, COMPOSITES AND NANO MATERIALS 9

Ceramics – types and applications-refractories, abrasives and cements – Composites:
classification, role of matrix and reinforcement -Fiber reinforced composites – carbon-carbon
composites –Nanomaterials: types, physical, chemical and mechanical properties - carbon
nanotubes: properties and applications - synthesis of nanomaterials: sonochemical, molecular
epitaxy, physical vapor deposition (PVD) and chemical vapor deposition (CVD). Characterization:
Transmission electron microscopy - scanning electron microscopy - Atomic force microscopy - X-
ray powder diffraction - Nanoparticle size calculation.

UNIT IV MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Tensile test - plastic deformation by slip – slip systems – mechanisms of strengthening in metals:
strain hardening, grain size reduction, solid solution strengthening, precipitation hardening –
Creep: creep curves,stress and temperature effects, mechanisms of creep, creep-resistant
materials – Fracture: ductile and brittle fractures - the Griffith criterion –fracture toughness -
Fatigue failure:the S-N curve – factors that affect fatigue life – Hardness: Rockwell and Brinell
hardness tests, Knoop and Vickers microhardness tests.

UNIT V OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Light waves in a homogeneous medium - refractive index - dispersion: refractive index-wave-
length behaviour - group velocity and group index – NLO materials – phase matching - SHG, sum
frequency generation, parametric oscillations – difference frequency generation (qualitative)-
applications- - complex refractive index and light absorption - Luminescence, phosphors and white
LEDs - polarization - optical anisotropy: uniaxial crystals, birefringence, dichroism - electro-optic
effect and amplitude modulators
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1 : Understand the basics of crystallography and its importance in materials properties
CO2 : Understand the basics of crystallography and crystal imperfections.
CO3 : Get knowledge on ferrous and nonferrous alloys.
CO4 : Acquire knowledge on the basics of ceramics, composites and nano-materials
CO5 : Learn about the concept of light - matter interactions and electro-optical effects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Balasubramaniam, Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering.Wiley (Indian Edition),
2014.
2. V.Raghavan. Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2015.
3. Safa O. Kasap, Optoelectronics and Photonics, Dorling Kindersley India, 2009

REFERENCES:
1. J.F.Shackelford. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers. Pearson, 2015.
2. Wendelin Wright and Donald Askeland, Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering,
CL Engineering, 2013.
3. William Smith and Javad Hashemi, Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering, Mc
Graw-Hill Education, 2018.
4. Rajesh Mishra and Jiri Militky, Nanotechnology in Textiles: Theory and Application,
Elsevier, 2018.
5. Mark Fox, Optical Properties of Solids, Oxford Univ. Press, 2012.

45
BE3252 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION LTPC
ENGINEERING 3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in domestic wiring
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To introduce the functional elements and working of sensors and transducers.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law -
Kirchhoff’s Laws – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis with Independent sources
only (Steady state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value,
Instantaneous power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady
state analysis of RLC circuits (Simple problems only), Three phase supply – star and delta
connection – power in three-phase systems

UNIT II MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 9

Magnetic circuits-definitions-MMF, flux, reluctance, magnetic field intensity, flux density, fringing,
self and mutual inductances-simple problems.
Domestic wiring , types of wires and cables, earthing ,protective devices- switch fuse unit-
Miniature circuit breaker-moulded case circuit breaker- earth leakage circuit breaker, safety
precautions and First Aid
.
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and
Applications. Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase
Alternator, Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.

UNIT IV ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction
Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications,
Rectifier and Inverters, harmonics

UNIT V SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9

Sensors, solenoids, pneumatic controls with electrical actuator, mechatronics, types of valves and
its applications, electro-pneumatic systems, proximity sensors, limit switches, piezoelectric, hall
effect, photo sensors,Strain gauge, LVDT, differential pressure transducer,optical and digital
transducers, Smart sensors, Thermal Imagers.
.TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2: Explain the concepts of domestics wiring and protective devices
CO3: Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO4: Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO5: Explain the types and operating principles of sensors and transducers
46
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, Second Edition, 2020
2. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic
Measurements & Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, 2019
4. James A Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits, Wiley,2018

REFERENCES:
1. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit theory and technology”, Routledge; 2017.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017
4. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Spice for Circuits and electronics”, 4th Edition.,Cengage
India,2019.
5. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 - - -
2 2 1 1 1 - - -
3 2 1 1 1 - - -
4 2 1 1 1 - - -
5 2 1 1 1 - - -
Avg. 2 1 1 1 - - -

GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Drawing engineering curves.
2. Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
3. Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
4. Drawing development of solids
5. Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)

Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid —
construction of involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above
curves.

47
 UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from
pictorial views of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 6+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD
Software(Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
• Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
• Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
• Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
• Draw the development of simple solids.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
rd
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015

REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 n d Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications, Bangalore,
27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
48
 5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition, 2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

CY3252 CHEMISTRY FOR TEXTILE TECHNOLOGISTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Gain proper understanding on spectroscopic and surface analytical techniques.
 Impart knowledge to students on the chemistry of surface and interfaces.
 Make students well versed on the chemical analysis of oils, fats, soaps & lubricants .
 Firmly establish a sound understanding on the student’s mind about chemicals and
auxiliaries.
 Familiarize students with the identification and characteristics of dyes and their
applications.

UNIT I SPECTROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES 9

Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic spectrum - absorption of radiation - electronic, vibrational and
rotational transitions. Width and intensities of spectral lines. Flame photometer, Atomic absorption
spectroscopy, UV- Vis, IR spectroscopy, Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and Transmission
Electron Microscope (TEM) - principles, instrumentation (Block diagram) and applications.

UNIT II CHEMISTRY OF INTERFACES 9

Interface region-curved interfaces-thermodynamics of surfaces - Surface film on liquids-
Adsorption of gases on Solids-adsorption isotherms – types. Applications of adsorption studies-
detergency, wetting, foaming , de foaming, spreading, water repellency.
49
UNIT III WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Water: Sources and impurities; Significance and estimation (only mention of methods) of -
turbidity, colour, pH, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, solids, chlorides, residual chlorine, sulphates,
fluorides, phosphates, iron and manganese, DO, BOD, COD, nitrogen, grease, volatile acids.
Treatment of water: Zeolites process and ion exchange demineralization; Desalination of water:
Reverse osmosis and Electro dialysis; Municipal water treatment: Primary treatment and
Disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).

UNIT IV OILS, FATS, SOAPS & LUBRICANTS 9

Chemical constitution, Chemical analysis of oils and fats – acid, saponification and iodine values,
Definitions, determinations and significance. Definition, mechanism of lubrication, preparation of
petrolubes, desirable characteristics – viscosity, viscosity index, carbon residue, oxidation stability,
flash and fire points, cloud and pour points, aniline point. Semisolid lubricant – greases,
preparation of sodium, lithium, calcium and axle greases and uses, consistency test and drop point
test. Solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide.

UNIT V CHEMICALS AND AUXILIARIES 9

Estimation of available chlorine in hypochlorite bleach liquor. Determination of strength of
hydrogen peroxide. Colorants - Theory of colour and constitution: chromophore and auxochrome,
bathochromic and hypsochromic shift, classification of dyes based on application and composition.
Chemistry of azo dye – synthesis of Methyl red, Methyl orange, Congo red, phenolphthalein,
fluorescein and eosin
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Understand and apply spectroscopic techniques for the analysis of engineering materials for
their end use applications.
CO2 : Make use of the applications of adsorption in detergency, wetting, spreading, foaming, de-
foaming, and water repellence and separation processes.
CO3 : Analyse and estimate oils, fats, lubricants and soap for their intended applications.
CO4 : Distinguish and demonstrate the role of different types of chemicals and auxiliaries.
CO5 : Realize the chemical structures, properties and relationships of different types of dyes and
their applications

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dhara S. S., “A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, 12thEd., S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Jain. P.C. and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpet Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 17th
Edition, 2018.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2019.

REFERENCES:
1. B.K. Sharma, “Industrial chemistry”, Krishna Prakashan Media (P) Ltd, Meerut, 2014.
2. Shore J., “Colourants and Auxiliaries: 2nd Edition, Volume 1 & 2, Wood head Publishing
Ltd., 2002.
3. Shenai V. A., “Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of Dyeing”, Sevak Publications, Mumbai,
1995.
4. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, B.Y Publishing Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.

50
GE3252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் LTPC
1 0 01
அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப்பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .

அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும்
நடுகல் லும் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் -
மொமல் லபுரெ் சிற் பங் களும் , மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப்
தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக்
மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள் பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி அம் மன்
ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர் மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ்
கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.

அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் –
நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் – கல் மணிகள் ,
கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் –
ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வமககள் .

அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நமட பரொமரிப்பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய
அறிவு – அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .

அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3

அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள
மின்பதிப் பு தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக்
கல் விக்கழகம் – தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் –
தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL: 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)

51
 (Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY LTPC

1001
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.

UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age - Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)-
Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during
British Period.

UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass
beads - Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.

UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3

Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3
Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
52
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T PC
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct
2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L 1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘Code 3
L 2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

53
 NCC Credit Course Level 1*
NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7

54
 PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT P C

0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in
commonhousehold wood work.
 Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
 Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly
of common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal
work.
 Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)
PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
PLUMBING WORK:

a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling,

unions, reducers,elbows and other components which are commonly used in
household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and
flexible pipes used inhousehold appliances.
WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.

Wood Work Study:

a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.
55
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board wiring with lamp,
fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater
GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.

BASIC MACHINING WORK:

a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.
ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an air conditioner.

SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray

FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.
PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:

a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:

a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household
wood work.
CO2 : Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
CO3: Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
56
CO4 : Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple
electronic components on PCB.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Avg 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

BE3272 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 04 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in conducting load tests electrical machines
 To gain practical experience in experimentally obtaining the characteristics of electronic
devices and rectifiers
 To train the students to measure three phase power and displacement

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Three Phase Power Measurement
3. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
4. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
5. Load test on Single phase Transformer
6. Load Test on Induction Motor
7. Characteristics of PN and Zener Diodes
8. Characteristics of BJT, SCR and MOSFET
9. Design and analysis of Half wave and Full Wave rectifiers
10. Measurement of displacement of LVDT
. TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s Law and to measure
three phase power
CO2: Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
CO3: Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
CO4: Use LVDT to measure displacement

CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
2 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
3 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
4 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
Avg. 1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6

57
GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective
discussions in a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them
clearly and precisely.
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
 To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context

UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life-
discussing past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).

UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.

UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios-
talking about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons-
discussing likes and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary
scenarios Writing: short essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.

UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.

UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues (making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing:
job application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
 Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
 Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
 Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
 Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks

Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.

58
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3357 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop Probability techniques in manufacturing and quality evaluation process.
 To familiarize the students with two dimensional random variables.
 To familiarize the student with Differential Equations.
 To make the students to understand various techniques of Correlation and Time series
Analysis.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating Statistical quality
control and to apply in the textile manufacturing industry.

UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 9+3

Probability – axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment Generating functions – Binomial, Poisson ,
Geometric , Uniform , Exponential , Gamma and Normal distributions.

UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 9+3

Join distributions – Marginal distributions and conditional distributions –Moments - Covariance -
Transforms of random variables – Central limit theorem.

UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of undermined coefficients.

UNIT IV CORRELATION, REGRESSION, INDEX NUMBERS AND TIMES

SERIES ANALYSIS 9+3
Correlation analysis, estimation of regression line. Time series analysis: Variations in time series,
trend analysis , cyclical variations , seasonal variations and irregular variations. Index Numbers –
Lasperyre’s, Paasche’s and Fisher’s Ideal Index.

UNIT V STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9+3

Control charts for measurements (X and R chart ) – Control charts for attributes ( p ,C and np)
charts – Tolerance limits – acceptance Sampling.
TOTAL PERIODS: 60
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Use the Probability techniques for solving practical problems.
CO2: Apply two dimensional random variable tools in solving various problems.
59
CO3: Able to solve differential Equations by applying various techniques.
CO4: Apply different methods of Correlation, Regression, Index Numbers and Times series
analysis in solving practical problems.
CO5: Apply statistical techniques in solving manufacturing and management related problems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
2. Milton. J. S. and Arnold. J.C., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill,
4th Edition, 2007.
3. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10 th
Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
4. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44 th
Edition , 2018.
5. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Sanjay Rastogi Masood Husain Siddiqui, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage
Learning, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
2. Papoulis, A. and Unnikrishnapillai, S., "Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes", McGraw Hill Education India, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Jain . R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
4. Publications, New Delhi, 5 th Edition, 2016.
5. Ramana. B.V., " Higher Engineering Mathematics ", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2016.
6. Prem.S.Mann, “Introductory Statistics” 7th Edition, Wiley India, 2016.
7. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to
Statistical Learning with Applications in R”, Springer, 2016.
8. Aczel A.D. and Sounderpandian J., “Complete Business Statistics”, 6th edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 1 2
Avg. 3 3 3 2 1.2 0.8 0 0.2 0 0 1.2 1.2 1.6 1.2 1.6

HT3301 HANDLOOM WEAVING TECHNOLOGY LTP C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand the principles of mechanisms of handloom weaving
such as primary, secondary and auxiliary motions, preparatory processes, yarn packages
etc.,
 To enable the students to perform calculations of yarn count, reed count and heald count
 To enable the students to gain the knowledge of the principles of working of various
handloom dobbies
UNIT I WEAVING PREPARATORY PROCESS 9
Yarn packages - hanks, cones, cheeses, and spools - Characteristics and use; Essential
characteristic of warp and weft, Objectives of winding and warping, peg warping, vertical warping
and sectional warping; objectives and importance of sizing of cotton yarn, ingredients used in size

60
mixture for handloom industry and their functions, various forms of sizing- hank sizing and street
warp sizing; Characteristics of ideal sizing, common defects during sizing- causes and remedies.
UNIT II SHEDDING AND PICKING MECHANISM 9
Evolution of handlooms, Various parts of a handloom and their functions, types of handlooms-
Throw shuttle handloom, Fly shuttle pit loom and frame loom; Relationship between type of
handloom and the product, passage of warp in frame loom; motions of a handloom; definitions of
primary, secondary & auxiliary, motions; Types of shed formations– centre closed shed, bottom
closed shed, top closed shed, open shed and semi open shed - advantages, disadvantages and
shedding devices; shedding mechanism of a handloom using treadles and heald reversing
motions – roller system, pulley reversing system and jack and lam rod system
UNIT III BEAT-UP AND SECONDARY MECHANISM 9
Picking mechanism of a handloom, types of shuttles – throw shuttle, fly shuttle and roller shuttle,
design and suitability; beat-up- open shed beat-up, closed shed beat up and crossed shed beat-up
in handlooms, different types of reed – bamboo reed, steel reed and all metal steel reed, suitability
for various fabrics; let off motion in handlooms – ratchet wheel and pawl, rope and weight, rope-
lever and weight motions; take up motion in handloom – poker rod, ratchet wheel & pawl; auxiliary
motions of a handloom – temple motion and terry motion; handloom dobbies – lattice dobby, barrel
dobby and vertical dobby
UNIT IV YARN NUMBERING SYSTEM 9
Introduction to numbering of yarns; indirect system of numbering of yarns – New English cotton,
New French, metric, worsted, woollen Yorkshire Skein, linen, spun yarn, Direct system of
numbering of yarns – Denier metric, flax/ jute/ hemp, Universal system of yarn numbering – Tex
and its derivatives - millitex, kilotex; Determination of conversion factors, Conversion of count of
yarn -indirect to indirect, direct to direct, indirect to direct, direct to indirect systems.
UNIT V YARN COUNT CACLCULATION 9
Determination of Equivalent/Resultant count of folded yarns with and without contraction during
twisting, costing of folded yarn, Average count of warp. Read Count - dents per linear space and
groups of dents per linear space models, Stockport System of Reed count - relation between reed
counts, number of ends per dent, ends per inch, cloth width, reed width and total number of ends,
heald count calculations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the yarn packages and the process of winding, warping and sizing
CO2: Explain the various parts, motions and shedding mechanism of handloom
CO3: Explain the various types of picking, beat up, let off and take up mechanism
CO4: Describe the direct and indirect yarn numbering systems
CO5: Explain the average count, reed count, heald count and its calculations
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sriramlu P.K., Ajgaonkar D.B. & Talukdar M.K., "Weaving Machines: Mechanisms,
Management", Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998.
2. Lord P.R. and Mohammed M.H., "Weaving – Conversion of Yarn to Fabric", Merrow
Publication, 1992.

REFERENCES:
1. John A. Iredale “Yarn Preparation: A Hand Book”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1992,
ISBN: 1853390429
2. Ormerod A. and Sondhelm W. S., “Weaving: Technology and Operations”, Textile Institute,
1995, ISBN: 187081276X.

61
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO1 PO1
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
Describe the yarn
packages and the
CO1 process of 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
winding, warping
and sizing.
Explain the
various parts,
CO2 motions and 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
shedding
mechanism of
handloom
Explain the various
types of picking,
CO3 beat up, let off and 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
take up
mechanism
Describe the
CO4 direct and indirect 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
yarn numbering
systems
Explain the
average count,
CO5 reed count, heald 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2
count and its
calculations
Overall CO 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively
62
 TT3354 TECHNOLOGY OF PRE-SPINNING PROCESS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the yarn numbering system used to specify textile yarns.
 To enable the students to understand the processes involved in the production of yarn from
fibres.
 To enable the students to understand the machinery used for the production of yarns using
short staple spinning system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SPINNING 9

Sequence of spinning machinery for producing carded, combed and blended yarns in short staple
and long staple spinning system; yarn numbering systems- direct, indirect and conversions;
influence of characteristics of raw material – fibre fineness, length, strength, elongation, stiffness,
fibre friction, cleanliness on spinning performance; spinnability

UNIT II GINNING AND BLOWROOM 9

Description and working of different types of gins; selection of right type of gins; ginning
performance on yarn quality; objectives, principle and description of opening, cleaning and
blending machines used in blowroom; chute feed; cleaning efficiency, production calculations.

UNIT III CARDING 9

Objectives and principle of carding; detailed study of flat card; autolevelling; card clothing and its
maintenance; drives and production calculation

UNIT IV COMBING 9
Objectives of comber preparatory; detailed study of sliver lap, ribbon lap and super lap formers;
objectives and principle of combing; sequence of combing operation; combing efficiency and
production calculation.

UNIT V DRAWING AND ROVING 9

Tasks of drawing machine; drafting systems used in modern drawing machines; autolevelling; draft
and production calculation; objectives of roving machine; working of roving machine; bobbin
builder mechanism – mechanical and electro-mechanical; draft, twist and production calculations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the staple yarn spinning processes and fibre characteristics.
CO2: Explain the ginning and blow room process and carryout calculations.
CO3: Describe the objective, principle and working of carding machine and carryout production
calculations..
CO4: Explain the preparatory for comber and combing process and carryout production
calculation.
CO5: Explain the process of drawing, roving and carryout draft, twist and production calculations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klein W., Vol. 1-3, “The Technology of Short Staple Spinning”, “A Practical Guide to
Opening & Carding” and “A Practical Guide to Combing, Drawing, and Roving frame”, The
Textile Institute, Manchester, U.K., 1998.
2. Chattopadhyay R. (Ed), Advances in Technology of Yarn Production, NCUTE, IIT Delhi,
2002.
3. Klein W., Vol.4 -5, “A Practical Guide to Ring Spinning, 1987” and “New Spinning Systems,
1993" The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1987.
4. Gowda R.V.M, “New Spinning Systems”, NCUTE, IIT Delhi, 2003.
63
REFERENCES:
1. Oxtoby E., “Spun Yarn Technology “, Butterworth, London, 1987
2. Klein W., “The Technology of Short-staple Spinning “, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1998
3. Klein W., “A Practical Guide to Opening and Carding “, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1999
4. Klein W., “A Practical Guide to Combing, Drawing and Roving Frame “, The Textile
Institute, Manchester, 1999
5. Lord P.R., “Yarn Production: Science, Technology and Economics “, The Textile Institute,
Manchester, 1999
6. Salhotra K.R. and Chattopadhyay R., “Book of papers on Blowroom and Card “, Indian
Institute of Technology, Delhi, 1998 41
7. Iredale J., “Yarn Preparation: A Handbook “, Intermediate Technology, 1992
8. Doraiswamy I., Chellamani P. and Pavendhan A., “Cotton Ginning, Textile Progress”, The
Textile Institute, Manchester, 1993.

64
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PSO3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Explain the staple
yarn spinning
CO1 processes and fibre
2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
characteristics.
Explain the ginning
and blow room
CO2 process and 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
carryout
calculations.
Describe the
objective, principle
and working of
CO3 carding machine and 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
carryout production
calculations.
Explain the
preparatory for
comber and combing
CO4 process and carryout
3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
production
calculations..
Explain the process
of drawing, roving
CO5 and carryout draft, 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
twist and production
calculations.
Overall CO 2.8 2.8 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

65
TT3351 PREPARATORY PROCESS FOR WOVEN FABRIC MANUFACTURE LTPC
3024
OBJECTIVES:
 The main objective of this course is to enable the students to understand the preparatory
processes involved in the production of fabrics.

UNIT I WINDING 13
Objects of winding; principles of cheese and cone winding machines; drum and precision winding;
uniform build of yarn package; types of drums – half accelerated and fully accelerated drums;
control of balloons; Classification of yarn faults and its removal; concepts in yarn clearing –
mechanical, optical and electronic clearers; knotters and splicers, weft winding; study of modern
automatic winders.

UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL IN WINDING 5

Faults in wound packages, their causes and remedies; winding synthetic and blended yarns;
winding for colouration; quality of knots and splices; winding performance; productivity;
maintenance; quality control; material handling.

UNIT III WARPING AND SIZING 18

Objectives of warping, material flow in beam warping and creels used in warping machines;
sectional warping machines. Sizing objectives of sizing; sizing materials and recipe used for
different types of fibers; size preparation equipment; sizing machines; sizing filament yarns;
concept of single end sizing, combined dyeing and sizing. Control concepts in modern sizing;
energy conservation in sizing; Sizing defects and production calculations.

UNIT IV PROCESS CONTROL IN WARPING AND SIZING 5

Process control in warping (production calculation, machine and labor productivity, control of end
breaks, quality and hard waste in warping); Control systems used in sizing machine.

UNIT V DRAWING- IN 4
Need for drawing-in operation; manual and automatic drawing- in, leasing, knotting and pinning
machines; selection and care of reeds, healds and drop pins, control of cross ends and extra ends
and calculations.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS (45L + 30P)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Analysis of Yarn faults
2. Control of production, package density, yarn faults in cone / cheese winding machine
3. Study of pirn winding
4. Study of warping machine
5. Study of sectional warping machine
6. Study of drawing – in, denting and tying

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the types of winding, yarn faults and automatic winding
CO2: Elucidate winding package faults and winding performance
CO3: Discuss the types of warping and sizing process
CO4: Describe the process control in warping and sizing
CO5: Explain the manual and automatic drawing in process
CO6: Analyse yarn faults and control of faults in cone / cheese finding
CO7: Understand the preparatory process of fabric manufacturing by practice.

66
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sriramlu P.K., Ajgaonkar D.B. & Talukdar M.K., "Weaving Machines: Mechanisms,
Management", Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998.
2. Lord P.R. and Mohammed M.H., "Weaving – Conversion of Yarn to Fabric", Merrow
Publication, 1992.

REFERENCES:
1. John A. Iredale “Yarn Preparation: A Hand Book”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1992,
ISBN: 1853390429
2. Lord P. R. and Mohamed M.H., “Weaving: Conversion of Yarn to Fabric”, Merrow, 1992,
ISBN: 090409538X
3. Ormerod A. and Sondhelm W. S., “Weaving: Technology and Operations”, Textile Institute,
1995, ISBN: 187081276X.

67
Course Marticulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PSO3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO1 Explain the types of winding, yarn 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
faults and automatic winding

CO2 Elucidate winding package faults 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3

and winding performance
CO3 Discuss the types of warping and 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
sizing process

CO4 Describe the process control in 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3

warping and sizing
CO5 Explain the manual and 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
automatic drawing in process
CO6 Analyse yarn faults and control of 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
faults in cone / cheese Winding
Understand the preparatory
CO7 process of fabric manufacturing 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
by practice
Overall CO 3 3 3 2.28 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2.71

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

68
TT3353 STRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES OF TEXTILE FIBRES LTPC
3024
OBJECTIVES:
The main objective of this course is to enable the students to understand the
 Structure and morphology of textile fibres
 Structure investigation techniques
 Physical characteristics textile fibres

UNIT I STRUCTURE OF FIBRES 9

Classification of fibres; study of morphological structures of fibers; physical properties of fibres;
order and disorder in fibre structure; molecular conformations – planar zig-zag, helical, lamellar,
and sperulite conformations

UNIT II STRUCTURE INVESTIGATION TECHNIQUES 9

Transmission and Scanning electron microscopes - principle; construction and working; X-ray
diffraction techniques – estimation of crystallinity; Infrared radiation and dichroism techniques;
chemical element and group identification by transmittance and optical density methods, molecular
orientation estimation

UNIT III MOISTURE ABSORPTION CHARACTERISTICS 9

Theories of moisture sorption; moisture absorption behaviour of natural and man-made fibres;
influence of fibre structure, humidity and temperature on the moisture absorption; conditioning of
fibres – mechanism of conditioning and factors influencing conditioning. Moisture diffusion in
fibres; heat of sorption – integral and differential, their relation; factors influencing heat of sorption -
measurement of heat of sorption

UNIT IV MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF FIBRES 9

Tensile characteristics –study of strength, elongation, work of rupture, initial modulus, work factor
and yield point – determination of yield point. Stress-strain relations of natural and manmade fibres
- influence of fibre structure, humidity and temperature on tensile characteristics. Time effect study
of creep phenomena. Elastic recovery and its relation to stress and strain of fibres; mechanical
conditioning of fibres and its influence on elastic recovery. Load cycling and extension cycling-their
effect on elastic recovery. Introduction about torsional and flexural rigidity of fibers

UNIT V OPTICAL, FRICTIONAL AND THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Reflexion and lustre-objective and subjective methods of measurement - refractive index and its
measurement - birefringence, factors influencing birefringence - absorption and dichroism friction –
static, limiting and kinetic friction, its measurement, comparison of fibres, directional friction in wool
– friction. thermal transitions of fibres - thermal conductivity, thermal expansion and contraction, Tg
and Tm; static electricity in textile fibres
TOTAL: 75 (45 L+30 P)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Identification of natural, regenerated and synthetic fibres
2. Determination of denier of synthetic fibres
3. Determination of moisture regain and moisture content of fibres
4. Determination of wax content and spin finish of natural and synthetic fibres
5. Identification of fibres and determination of the blend proportion of
a. Cotton/ regenerated cellulose
b. Polyester/ protein fibres
c. Cellulose/polyester fibres
d. Cotton/ viscose/polyester

69
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of this course, the student shall be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and properties of fibres
CO2: Identify the method of investigation of structure of fibres
CO3: Compare and understand moisture absorption behaviour of various fibres
CO4: Demonstrate the tensile and elongation properties of fibres
CO5: Interpret the optical, thermal and frictional characteristics of fibres
CO6: Identify the fibres using, solubility, burning and microscopic test.
CO7: Determine the linear density and moisture properties of fibres

TEXTBOOKS
1. Morton W.E., and Hearle J.W.S.,“Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN978-1-84569-220-95
2. Hearle J.W.S.,Lomas B.,and CookeW.D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”,The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN:1855733196

REFERENCES
1. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU ISBN-13:
2. MukhopadhyayS. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379
3. MeredithR.,“MechanicalPropertiesofTextileFibres”,NorthHolland,Amsterdam,1986,ISBN:
1114790699, ISBN-13:9781114790698
4. RaheelM. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
5. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN:1870812115
6. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties : Fundamentals of Structures and
Mechanics Vol1”,EllisHorwood,England,1982,ISBN:047027302X|ISBN13:9780470273029
7. Greaves. P. H., and Saville B.P., “Microscopy of Textile Fibres”, Bios Scientific, U.K., 1995,
ISBN: 1872748244 | ISBN-13:9781872748245
8. Seville. B. P., “Physical Testing of Textiles”, Woodhead Publishing, 1999,ISBN:
1855733676 | ISBN-13:9781855733671
9. Hearle J. W. S., and Peters. R. H., “Fibre structure”, Elsevier Ltd, 1963, ISBN: 1483212211
| ISBN-13:9781483212210

70
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Explain the structure and properties of fibres 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Identify the Method of investigation of structure of
CO2 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
fibres
Compare and understand moisture absorption
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
behaviour of various fibres
Demonstrate the tensile and elongation properties
CO4 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
of fibres
Interpret the optical, thermal and frictional
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
characteristics of fibres
Identify the fibres using, solubility, burning and
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 2
microscopic test.
Determine the linear density and moisture
CO7 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 2
properties of fibres
Overall CO 3 3 2.28 3 2 - 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

71
TT3352 PRODUCTION OF TEXTILE FIBRES LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about the natural fibre production, polymer rheology and
the laws, and various spinning techniques of manufactured fibre production
 To expose the students to post spinning and development in the spinning process
UNIT I NATURAL FIBERS 12
Natural Fibers- production, properties and applications- Evolution of cotton varieties & Cultivation
and harvesting; Bast Fibers: cultivation – Retting – Fibre Extraction; Wool: Types – Rearing –
Shearing – Chemical Composition; Silk: life cycle of silk worm, Types – Reeling – Throwing

UNIT II MELT SPINNING 9

Newtonian and non-newtonian fluids, Melt instabilities; Melt Spinning- Polymer Selection and
Preparation, equipment, properties and applications of polyester, polyamide and polypropylene
fibers.

UNIT III SOLUTION SPINNING 9

Solution spinning- Polymer Selection and Preparation, equipment, properties and applications of
acrylic, polyurethane and regenerated cellulose fibres.

UNIT IV POST SPINNING OPERATIONS 9

Neck drawing, drawing systems, influence of drawing on structure and properties of fibres; Types
of heat setting, influencing parameters on heat setting, influence of heat setting on fibre behavior;
Spin finish composition and application; texturising.

UNIT V DEVELOPMENTS IN FIBER SPINNING 6

Liquid crystal spinning; Gel spinning; Profile fibres and hollow fibres; Speciality fibres: polylactic
acid and chitosan fibres preparation properties and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student shall be able to
CO1: Recognize the cultivation and production of natural fibres
CO2: Explain the polymer rheology and polymer process parameters involved in melt spinning.
CO3: Demonstrate the various spinning techniques of polymers parameter involved in spinning
synthetic yarn
CO4: Infer the need of various post spinning operations
CO5: Describe the advances in the spinning process

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothari V. K., “Textile Fibres: Development and Innovations”, Vol. 2, Progress in Textiles,
IAFL Publications, New Delhi, 2000
2. Vaidya A. A., “Production of Synthetic Fibres”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1988
3. Nakasjima (English edition, edited by Kajiwara K. and McIntyre J. E.), “Advanced Fibre
Spinning Technology”, Wood head Publication Ltd., England, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Gupta V. B. and Kothari V. K. (Editors), “Manufactured Fibre Technology”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 1997.
2. Cook J. G., “Handbook of Textile Fibres: Vol. 2: Man Made Fibres”, The Textile Inst., 5th Ed.
1984.
3. Srinivasa Murthy H. V., “Introduction to Textile Fibres”, Textile Association, India, 1987.
4. Cook J.G., “Handbook of Textile Fibres: Vol. 1: Natural Fibres” The Textile Inst., 2001

72
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PSO3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO1 Recognize the cultivation and 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3
production of natural fibres
Explain the polymer rheology
CO2 and polymer process parameters 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3
involved in melt spinning
Demonstrate the various spinning
CO3 techniques of polymers parameter 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3
involved in spinning synthetic yarn
Infer the need of various post
CO4 spinning operations 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3

CO5 Describe the advances in the 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3

spinning process
Overall CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - 1 3 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

73
TT3361 PRE-SPINNING LABORATORY LTP C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn passage of materials for ginning, cleaning machines and
carding.
 To enable the students to learn passage of materials for drawing and roving machines.
 To enable the students to learn bobbin building and process parameters roving bobbins.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Construction details of Ginning machine, material passage and ginning out turn calculations
2. Construction details of blowroom machines material passage and production calculations
3. Determine the process parameters of 100% cotton material, running of blowroom machines to
produce lap and running of carding machines to produce sliver
4. Construction details of carding machine, material passage and production calculations
5. Wire point specifications and various settings in a carding machine
6. Construction details of drawing machine, material passage, draft and production calculations
7. Study of construction details of comber preparatory machines, draft, and production calculations
of those machines
8. Study of construction details of comber machines, combing cycle and production calculations
9. Construction details of roving machine, material passage, draft and production calculations
10. Study of bobbin builder mechanism in roving machine.
11. Study of roving frame bobbin stretch variation and to determine the count variation within
bobbin, between bobbin and between front and back row bobbins.
12. Determine process parameters of drawing and roving machines to produce roving bobbins.
13. Handling of accessories – Tachometer, top roller load measuring devices, pressure gauge,
roller eccentricity measuring gauge, leaf gauge, vernier caliber for roller settings, shore hardness
tester etc.,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Discuss the ginning, cleaning machine’s material passage and carryout production
calculations.
CO2: Explain the carding, drawing and roving machine’s material passage and carryout production
calculations.
CO3: Understand the process parameters in the blow room, carding machine draw frame and
roving machines

74
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO
Outcomes PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2
Discuss the ginning,
cleaning machine’s
material passage
CO1. and carryout 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
production
calculations.
Explain the carding,
drawing and roving
machine’s material
CO2. passage and 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
carryout production
calculations.
Understand the
process parameters
in the blow room,
CO3. 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
carding machine
draw frame and
roving machines
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

75
HT3311 HANDLOOM WEAVING LABORATORY LTPC
002 1
OBJECTIVES:
To practically train the students
 On various process and technology of handloom weaving.
 Develop plain and twill weave fabrics.
 Develop mock-leno, honeycomb and huck-a-back weave fabrics.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Drawing sketches of different parts of handlooms with specifications and joining threads by
piecing and knotting
2. Practice of Drawing–in, denting and gaiting up
3. Practice of winding of yarn on double flanged bobbins and pirns using charka
4. Practice of warping process on peg warping frame
5. Practice of warping process on sectional warping machine
6. Study of weave, peg/tie-up plan and loom setting on multi treadle frame loom
7. Development of fabric samples using Plain and its derivatives
8. Development of fabric samples using twill weave and its derivatives
9. Development of fabric samples using Mock-Leno weave
10. Development of fabric samples using Honeycomb weave
11. Development of fabric samples using Huck-A-Back weave
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the parts and specifications of handloom.
CO2: Describe the winding, warping process, drawing – in, denting,
CO3: Develop the derivatives of plain, twill weave fabrics, Mock –leno and
honey comb weave fabrics and Huck –a back weave fabrics.

76
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PSO3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO1 Explain the parts and 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 3 1 3
specifications of handloom
CO2 Describe the winding, warping 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 3 1 3
process, drawing – in, denting
Develop the derivatives of plain,
CO3 twill weave fabrics, Mock –leno and 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 3 1 3
honey comb weave fabrics and
Huck –a back weave fabrics.
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 3 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

77
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC
0 021
OBJECTIVES:
 To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using
standard templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance
the presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS
PowerPoint, including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media
elements and enhance the overall quality of presentations.

MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility

MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook

MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation

78
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their
day to day technical and academic requirements
 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.

TT3454 TECHNOLOGY OF YARN SPINNING LTPC

3024
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn ring spinning and condensed spinning process.
 To enable the students to understand the yarn plying, twisting, types fancy yarn and
method of production.
 To enable the students to learn rotor, friction, air jet, vortex, core and wrap spun yarn
production methods.
 To enable the students to learn material passage, draft and production calculation of ring
and rotor spinning.
 To enable the students to learn process parameters and production of ring and rotor spun
yarn

UNIT I RING SPINNING 13

Principle of yarn formation in ring spinning machines; working of ring spinning machine; cop
building; design features of important elements used in ring spinning machine; draft, twist and
production calculations in ring spinning machine; end breakage rate – causes and remedies yarn
faults- causes and remedies

UNIT II CONDENSED YARN SPINNING 5

Condensed yarn spinning – principle, different methods, properties; comparison with ring spun
yarn

UNIT III YARN PLYING 9

Merits of plying of yarns; methods followed for plying – TFO, ring twisting; selection of twist level
for plying; calculation of resultant count of plied yarns; types of fancy yarns, method of production

UNIT IV ROTOR SPINNING 9

Principle of open-end spinning; principle of yarn production by rotor spinning system; design
features of important elements used in rotor spinning; structure and properties of rotor yarn

UNIT V OTHER SPINNING SYSTEMS 9

Friction, single and two nozzle air jet and air vortex spinning methods – principle of yarn
production, raw material used, structure, properties and applications; principle of yarn production
by electrostatic, self-twist, core, wrap, integrated compound spinning systems.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS (45L + 30P)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Construction details of Ring spinning machine, material passage, draft and production
calculations
2. Study of bobbin builder mechanism in ring spinning machine

79
 3. Study of ring spinning machine and to calculate draft and twist. To determine yarn twist
variation when the yarn wind at minimum and maximum diameters of bobbin
4. Construction details of rotor spinning machine, material passage, draft and production
calculations.
5. Production of yarn in ring spinning machine
6. Production of yarn in rotor spinning machine
7. Study and analysis of MIS report of spinning Mill.
8. Study and analysis of spectrogram, V-L curve. and evenness test results.

OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Discuss the yarn formation, draft, twist and production calculation in ring spinning.
CO2: Explain the principle, properties and different methods of condensed yarn spinning.
CO3: Describe the yarn plying and production methods of fancy yarn.
CO4: Explain the principle, properties and different methods of rotor spinning.
CO5: Explain the friction, air jet, vortex, self twist, core and wrap yarn production methods.
CO6: Describe the material passage and carryout twist, draft and production calculation of ring
CO7: Determine the process parameters of ring and rotor spinning machines.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klein W., Vol. 1-3, “The Technology of Short Staple Spinning”, “A Practical Guide to Opening
& Carding” and “A Practical Guide to Combing, Drawing, and Roving frame”, The Textile
Institute, Manchester, U.K., 1998.
2. Chattopadhyay R. (Ed), Advances in Technology of Yarn Production, NCUTE, IIT Delhi,
2002.
3. Klein W., Vol.4 - 5, “A Practical Guide to Ring Spinning", 1987, and “New Spinning
Systems", 1993, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1987.
4. Gowda R.V.M, “New Spinning Systems”, NCUTE, IIT Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. Oxtoby E., “Spun Yarn Technology “, Butterworth Publications, London, 1987
2. Lord P.R., “Yarn Production: Science, Technology and Economics”, The Textile Institute,
Manchester, 1999
3. Shaw J., “Short-staple Ring Spinning, Textile Progress”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1982
4. Iredale J., “Yarn Preparation: A Handbook “, Intermediate Technology, 1992.

80
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Discuss the yarn formation, draft,
CO1 twist and production calculation in 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
ring spinning.
Explain the principle, properties and
CO2 different methods of condensed yarn 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
spinning.
Describe the yarn plying and
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
production methods of fancy yarn.
Explain the principle, properties and
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
different methods of rotor spinning.
Explain the , friction, air jet, vortex, self
CO5 twist, core and wrap yarn production 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
methods
Describe the material passage and
carryout twist, draft and production
CO6 calculation of ring and rotor spinning 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
machines
Determine the process
CO7 parameters of ring and rotor 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 2
spinning machines.
Overall CO 3 3 3 2.28 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 1 1.28

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

81
TT3453 TECHNOLOGY OF WOVEN FABRIC MANUFACTURE LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand various functions of weaving machine and process
control

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEAVING 5

Yarns quality requirements for high speed automatic shuttle looms and shuttle less loom; warp and
weft preparation for high speed looms; Principle of weaving, passage of material, motions in loom
– primary, secondary and auxiliary motions, plain power loom driving, timing of motions.

UNIT II SHEDDING MOTIONS 9

Shed geometry and shedding requirement. Types of shed. Shedding mechanisms – positive and
negative. Principles of tappet, dobby and jacquard shedding mechanisms, reversing mechanisms-
limitations of various shedding mechanisms; Conventional and modern dobby and jacquard
mechanism.

UNIT III WEFT INSERTION AND BEAT UP 9

Shuttle picking and checking mechanisms, shuttle flight and timing; Weft feeder – types, Principles
of weft insertions in shuttle less looms; mechanism of weft insertion by projectile, rapier loom and
jet – air and water. Multi-Phase weaving systems; Kinematics of sley, sley eccentricity; beat up
mechanism in modern looms;

UNIT IV SECONDARY AND AUXILARY MOTIONS 13

Take up and let – off motions used in plain power looms; cloth formation, weaving condition –
factors and control; warp protector and warp and weft stop motion; plain power loom accessories.
Automatic weft replenishment in shuttle looms – pirn changing and shuttle changing looms;
mechanisms involved in automatic pirn changing – feelers, cutters, design of shuttle, three try
motions; multi shuttle looms- box changing principle, Automatic pirn changing in multi shuttle loom.
Weft arrival control and automation in shuttle less looms; selvedges in shuttle less looms; quick
style change;

UNIT V PROCESS CONTROL & SPECIAL WEAVING PROCESSES 9

Techno economics of shuttle less loom weft insertion systems; loom monitoring and control Loom
stoppages and efficiency; fabric defects and value loss; fabric shrinkage in the loom – causes and
control; fabric engineering. Filament weaving – Silk & Texturised yarns. Principles and
mechanisms in weaving Pile fabrics, tapes and triaxial fabrics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the primary, secondary and auxiliary motions of loom
CO2: Discuss the types of shedding mechanisms
CO3: Explain the types of weft insertion and beat up mechanisms
CO4: Describe the let – off, take – up and shuttle changing mechanism
CO5: Discuss the process control in weaving and special weaving processes

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Talukdar, M.K., “An Introduction to Winding and Warping”, Textile Trade Press, Mumbai.
2. Talukdar M.K., Sriramulu P.K. and Ajgaonkar D.B., “Weaving: Machines, Mechanisms,
Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-85401-16-0
3. Marks R. and Robinson T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1989,
ISBN: 0 900739 258

82
REFERENCES:
1. Ajgaonkar, D.B., “Sizing, Materials, Methods and Machines”, Textile Trade Press, Mumbai,
1982.
2. “Weaving: The knowledge in Technology”, Papers Presented at the Textile Institute Weaving
Conference 1998, Textile Institute, ISBN: 18770372182
3. Booth J.E., “Textile Mathematics Volume 3”, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1977, ISBN:
090073924X
4. Lord P.R. and Mohamed M.H., “Weaving: Conversion of Yarn to Fabric”, Merrow, 1992,
ISBN: 090409538X
5. Ormerod A. and Sondhelm W.S., “Weaving: Technology and operations”, Textile Institute,
1995, ISBN: 187081276X
6. Sabit Adanur, “Handbook of Weaving”, Technomic Publishing Co. Inc., 2001

83
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO1 PO2 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO PSO3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
Explain the primary, secondary
CO1 and auxiliary motions of loom 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Discuss the types of shedding
CO2 mechanism 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Explain the types of weft insertion
CO3 and beat up mechanism 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Describe the let – off, take – up
CO4 and shuttle changing mechanism 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Discuss the process control in
CO5 weaving and special weaving 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
processes
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

84
TT3452 KNITTING TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to understand fundamentals of knitting, types of knitting processes in
detail, the functioning of components of knitting machine and knitted fabric structures.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5
Reasons for the growth of the knitting industry; comparison of fabric properties - woven, knits and
bonded fabrics; classification of knitting processes – weft knit & warp knit; yarn quality
requirements for knitting; preparation of staple yarns for weft and warp knitting

UNIT II FUNDAMENTALS OF KNITTING 9

General definitions and principles of knitting; types of knitting needles – Bearded, Latch &
Compound needle; elements of knitted loop structure

UNIT III WEFT KNITTING 13

Basic weft knitted structures and their production - plain, rib, interlock and purl; fundamentals of
formation of knit, tuck and float stitches; factors affecting the formation of loop; effect of loop length
and shape on fabric properties; analysis of various types of weft knitted structures; weft knitted
fabric geometry; basic principles and elements of flat knitting machines; different types of flat
knitting machines- manual, mechanical and computer controlled; production of various weft knitted
structures using flat knitting machines;

UNIT IV WEFT KNITTING MACHINE 9

Construction, characteristics and working of circular knitting machines used for the production of
basic structures; production of derivatives of weft knitted structures; needle control in circular
knitting machines; quality control in knitted fabric production; production calculation; safety
measures to be taken at knitting industry; process control in weft knitting

UNIT V WARP KNITTING 9

Basic principles; elements of warp knitted loop – open loop, closed loop; warp knitting elements
chain link, chain links for simple patterns, guide bar movement mechanism; Tricot and Rachel
warp knitting machines; principles of double needle bar patterning, terry pile fabric production; let
off system; run in value based on the lapping diagram; take up system; theoretical concepts of
warp knitted loop configuration; uses of warp knitted fabrics in technical applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Classify the knitting process and understand the yarn requirements for knitting process
CO2: Explain the types of knitting needle and elements of knitting
CO3: Discuss the weft knit structures
CO4: Explain the working of weft knitting machines and its types
CO5: Discuss the principle, elements and types of warp knitting machines

TEXTBOOKS
1. Chandrasekhar Iyer, Bernd Mammel and Wolfgang Schach., “Circular Knitting”,
Meisenbach GmbH, Bamberg, 1995, ISBN: 3-87525-066-4.
2. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN:
185573 333 1.

REFERENCES
1. Ajgaonkar D.B., “Knitting Technology”, Universal Publishing Corporation, Mumbai, 1998,
ISBN: 81-85027-34-X.

85
2. Samuel Raz., “Flat Knitting: The new generation”, Meisenbach GmbH, Bamberg, 1997,
ISBN: 3-87525-054-0.
3. Samuel Raz., “Warp Knitting production”, MelliandTextilberichte, GmbH, Rohrbacher,
1987, ISBN: 3-87529-022.
4. Baneerjee.P.K., “Principles of Fabric Formation”, CRC Press, London, 2014, ISBN
Number:13:978-1-4665-5445-0
5. Ray.S.C., “Fundamentals and advances in Knitting Technology”, Woodhead Publishing
India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi. 2011, ISBN: 978-93-80308-16-6.
6. Abhijit Majumdar, Apurba Das, R.Alagirusamy and V.K.Kothari., “Process Control in Textile
Manufacturing”, Wood Head Publishing Limited, Oxford, 2013, ISBN: 978-0-85709-027-0.
7. Gajjap B.J., “Handbook of warp Knitting Technology”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 2004,
ISBN: 1 85573 7701.

86
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Classify the knitting process and
CO1 understand the yarn requirements for 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
knitting process
Explain the types of knitting needle
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
and elements of knitting
CO3 Discuss the weft knit structures 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Explain the working of weft
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
knitting machines and its types
Discuss the principle, elements and
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
types of warp knitting machine
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

87
TT3451 CHEMICAL PROCESSING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS I LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about pre-treatment processes and the machineries
involved in the wet processing and dyeing of textiles fabrics.

UNIT I PREPARATORY PROCESS 9

Pretreatments-process Sequence; singeing and desizing of natural and synthetic fibres and its
blends; heat setting; Scouring, bleaching and mercerization of cotton, bio-scouring of cotton;
carbonization, scouring and bleaching of wool; degumming and bleaching of silk

UNIT II PROCESSING MACHINERIES 9

Loose stock machine; hank and package processing machines; singeing machines; stretching
devices; shearing and raising machines; kiers; mangles; jigger; winch; jet and soft flow machines J
– Box ; yarn mercerizer, chain and chainless mercerizes; washing ranges, hydro extractors;
detwisters; dryers; stenters

UNIT III THEORY OF DYEING 9

Dyeing equilibrium; dye-fibre interaction; adsorption isotherm; dye affinity; heat of dyeing; half
dyeing time. Basic characteristics of dyes and pigments; classification of dyes and principle of
application of dyes.

UNIT IV DYEING 9
Technology of application of direct, reactive, vat, disperse, acid and basic dyes.

UNIT V COLOUR SCIENCE 9

Theories of colour measurement, Beer–Lambert’s law and Kubelka-Munk theory and their
application in colour assessment and colour matching; whiteness and yellowness indices.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate the scouring and bleaching of textile fabrics
CO2: Describe the functions of chemical processing machineries
CO3: Explain the theory, classification and application of dyes
CO4: Explain application of dye for various fibres
CO5: Explain the theory and measurement of color

TEXT BOOKS
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, B.I Publishing Pvt.Ltd.
New Delhi, 1994 , ISBN: 0471809101 | ISBN-13: 9780471809104
2. Menachem Lewin and Eli M. Pearce, “Handbook of Fibre Chemistry: Second Edition,
Revised and Expanded, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 1998.
3. Menachem Lewin and Stephen B. Sello., “Handbook of Fibre Science and Technology:
Volume I: Chemical Processing of Fibres and Fabrics-Fundamentals and Preparation Part
A”, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 1983.
4. Karmakar S. R., “Chemical Technology in the Pre-treatment Process of Textiles”, Elsevier
sciences B.V., 1999.
5. Shenai V.A., “Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of Dyeing”, Sevak Publications, Mumbai,
1995.

REFERENCES
1. Choudhury A. K. R., “Textile Preparation and Dyeing”, SDC India Region,2011.
2. Bhagwat R. S., “Handbook of Textile Processing”, Colour Publication, Mumbai. 1999.

88
3. Cavaco-Paulo A. and Gubitz G. M., “Textile Processing with enzymes”, Woodhead
Publication Ltd., 2003.
4. Chakraborty J.N., "Fundamentals and practice in Colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India Pvt Ltd, India, 2010, ISBN: 184569788X | ISBN-13: 9781845697884.
5. Mittal R.M., and Trivedi S.S., “Chemical Processing of Polyester/Cellulosic Blends”, 2nd ed.,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
6. Burkinshaw S. M., “Chemical Principles of Synthetic Fibre Dyeing", Springer-Science +
Business Media, B.V., 2012, ISBN: 9401042632 | ISBN-13: 9789401042635.

89
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Demonstrate the scouring and
CO1 bleaching of textile fabrics 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Describe the functions of chemical
CO2 processing machineries 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Explain the theory, classification
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
and application of dyes
Explain application of dye for
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
various fibres
Explain the theory and
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2
measurement of color
Overall CO 3 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

90
HT3401 FABRIC STRUCTURE I LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Understand the construction and classification woven fabrics.
 Understand the concept of design elements and features of basic weaves.
 Construct the different kinds of basic weave structures.
 Develop toweling, fancy weaves and color and weave effect.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE DESIGNING 9

Classification of textile fabrics; classification of woven fabrics - simple, compound and complex;
fundamental aspects of woven fabrics-count of graph paper, Methods of representing design on
graph paper; Principle of Design, draft, denting, lifting & tie-up plans. Types of draft - straight draft,
skipped draft, pointed draft, herring bone draft, mixed draft etc. Plain weave - ornamentation of
plain weaves; study of derivative structures of plain weave – regular and irregular warp rib, weft
rib, hopsack and basket weaves. Catch-cord technique; design, draft, denting, peg/tie-up plan and
thread interlacing diagram of above weaves

UNIT II TWILL WEAVES AND ITS DERIVATIVES 9

Study of twill weaves up to 12 threads; classification of twills - warp faced twill, weft faced twill and
equal faced twill, Left hand twill and Right hand twill; angle of inclination of twill diagonals- Steep
twill and Flat twill; influence of the twist direction of yarn over prominence of twill lines; study of
derivatives of twill weaves - wavy twill, herringbone, transposed twill, broken twill, elongated twill,
combined twill, figured twill– Drafts, lifting plan & tie up, treadling plan for the above designs

UNIT III DIAMOND AND SATIN WEAVES 9

Diamond weave, twill dice check, diaper; regular and irregular sateen and satin up to 12 threads,
satin dice check weaves; design, draft, denting, peg/tie-up plan and thread interlacing diagram of
above weaves. Difference between diamond and diaper, satin and sateen.

UNIT IV TOWELLING WEAVES 9

Study of honey comb weaves– ordinary honey comb, stitched honey comb and Brighton’s honey
comb designs- cell formation; study of Huck-a-Back weave- Construction of Standard Huck- a -
Back (10 X 10), Devon’s Huck– a– Back ; mock-leno and corkscrew weaves. Design, draft, and
peg/tie-up plan and thread interlacing diagram of above weaves

UNIT V FANCY AND COLOUR AND WEAVE EFFECTS 9

Crepe weaves – construction upon sateen base, by combination of floating weaves with plain
thread, by reversing and by insertion of one weave over another. Combination of weaves – twill
and plain, mock-leno and plain, honey comb and plain, stripe and check effect by these
combinations; Introduction to colour and weave effects- continuous line effect, hounds tooth
patterns, bird’s eye and spot effects, hairline stripes, step patterns and all over effects. Distorted
thread effects – salient feature, warp and weft distortion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Identify and construct plain weave and its derivatives.
CO2: Create different twill weaves structures and its derivatives.
CO3: Draw the designs of Diamond and satin weaves.
CO4: Develop woven fabric designs suitable for towels.
CO5: Create fabric designs using different color and weave effects.

91
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grosicki Z. J., “Watson’s Textile Design and Colour”, Vol.1, Woodhead Publications,
Cambridge England, 2004.
2. Grosicki Z. J., “Watson’s Advanced Textile Design and Colour”, Vol.II, Butterworths,
London, 1989.
3. Grammar of Textile Design by H. NISBET, F.T.I.

REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Wilson J., “Handbook of Textile Design”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001.
2. Horne C.E., “Geometric Symmetry in Patterns and Tilings”, Textile Institute, Manchester,
2000.
3. Seyam A. M., “Structural Design of Woven Fabrics, Theory and Practice”, Textile Institute,
Manchester, 2002.
4. Georner D, “Woven Structure and Design, part 1: Single Cloth Construction”,WIRA, U.K.,
1986.
5. Georner D, “Woven Structure and Design, Part 2: Compound Structures”, WIRA, U.K.,
1989.

92
 Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program

Outcomes Outcome
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Identify and construct plain weave
CO1 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
and its derivatives
Create different twill weaves
CO2 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
structures and its derivatives
Draw the designs of Diamond and
CO3 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
satin weaves
Develop woven fabric designs
CO4 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
suitable for towels
Create fabric designs using different
CO5 color and weave effects 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
Overall CO 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

93
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
emphasize on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and
nonrenewable resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental
management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity– values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts.

UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY. 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different
types new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal
energy conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects
of sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and
protocols-Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate
change- Global, Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies.
Concept of Carbon Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.

UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6

Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy
Cycles-carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization-
Socio-economic and technological change.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity
and their conservation.
 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and
contribute to the preventive measures in the society.
94
  To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
 To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials,
energy cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 .
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ.,
House, Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press,
2005.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

95
 NCC Credit Course Level 2*
NX3451 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C
3 0 0 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

ARMED FORCES 6
AF 1 Armed Forces, Army, CAPF, Police 6

ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2
BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 2*

NX3452 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LTPC
3 003
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
96
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
AF 1 Armed Forces and Navy Capsule 3
EEZ 1 EEZ Maritime Security and ICG 3

ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1

BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2

BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 2*

NX3453 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C
3 00 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 6

GSK 1 Armed Forces & IAF Capsule 2
GSK 2 Modes of Entry in IAF, Civil Aviation 2
GSK 3 Aircrafts - Types, Capabilities & Role 2

ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1
97
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2
BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TT3461 FABRIC MANUFACTURE LABORATORY LT PC

0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students on different mechanisms of plain loom

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of depth of shed and heald shaft movements in tappet shedding mechanism
2. Preparation of pattern card for dobby shedding mechanism and way in which adjust the depth of
shed
3. Study of dobby shedding mechanism
4. Study of jacquard shedding mechanism
5. Study of picking mechanisms in looms
6. Determination of sley eccentricity in shuttle loom
7. Study of let-off mechanisms
8. Determination of pick space through 5 and 7 wheel take-up mechanisms
9. Study of weft replenishment mechanism in shuttle looms
10. Method of achieving the required colour patterns in 4 X 1 drop box motion
11. Study of warp stop, weft stop and warp protector mechanisms
12. Understanding of the loom requirements from the given sample
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students would have practical knowledge on
CO1: Shedding and picking mechanism
CO2: Beat up, Let- off, take – up mechanisms and warp and weft stop motions
CO3: Colour patterning in weaving machine

98
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO12 PSO PSO
PO PO 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 PSO
1 1
1 2 0 3
Discuss the shedding
CO1 and picking 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
mechanism
Beat up, Let- off,
take – up
CO2 mechanisms and 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
warp and weft stop
motions
Color patterning in
CO3 weaving machine 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

99
TT3462 FABRIC STRUCTURE ANALYSIS LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to analyse different fabrics for structure and constructional details

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
 Analysis of weave and construction details (Design, Draft, lifting plan, thread density, warp,
weft count, crimp, GSM) of fabrics with
1. Plain weave
2. Rib/mat weaves
3. Twill/wavy twill weaves
4. Herringbone/diamond/diaper
5. Sateen and satin weaves
6. Crepe weaves
7. Honeycomb, huck-a-back and mock-leno weaves
8. Double cloth
9. Terry weaves
10. Bedford cord weaves
11. Determination of weave plan for manufacturing 100 meter of different woven fabrics
12. Analysis of structure and construction details of single jersey and double jersey knit fabrics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Draw the structure of woven fabrics with different weaves and structure of knitted fabrics.
CO2 Extract the weave from the given sample and draw the weave, draft and peg- plan for re-
production.
CO3: Develop the weave plan for production of woven fabrics

100
 Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
es 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Draw the structure of
woven fabrics with
CO1 different weaves and 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
structure of knitted
fabrics
Extract the weave
from the given
CO2 sample and draw the 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
weave, draft and peg-
plan for re-production
Develop the weave
CO3 plan for production of 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
woven fabrics
Overall CO 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

101
HT3512 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING / INTERNSHIP I* LTPC
000 1
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Get connected with industry/ laboratory/research institute
 Get practical knowledge on production process in the industry and develop skills to solve
related problems
 Develop skills to carry out research in the research institutes/laboratories

The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories for the
specified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be submitted within ten
days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be evaluated as per the
Regulations.
No.of. Weeks: 02
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student will know about
CO1: Plant layout, machinery, organizational structure and production processes in the firm or
research facilities in the laboratory/research institute
CO2: Analysis of industrial / research problems and their solutions
CO3: Documenting of material specifications, machine and process parameters, testing
parameters and results
CO4: Preparing of Technical report and presentation

TT3591 TESTING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students understand the principle and method of working of equipment’s used
for testing of textile materials
UNIT I SAMPLING AND FIBRE TESTING 9
Sampling: Sampling of fibres, yarns and fabrics. Standard test atmosphere, measurement of
relative humidity. Moisture content and regain of textile materials: Measurement methods. Fibre
Length Measurement; Fibre Fineness Measurement. Measurement of cotton fibre maturity, trash
and micro dust. High Volume instruments, Advanced fibre information system. Standards and
norms
UNIT II YARN TESTING 9
Yarn testing - yarn numbering, twist in single and ply yarns, single yarn strength, lea strength, yarn
mass evenness, yarn hairiness; yarn friction– static and dynamic; standards and norms
UNIT III TESTING OF FABRIC MECHANICAL PROPERTIES - 9
Fabric testing - tensile, tear, bursting strength, ballistic impact, Low stress mechanical properties -
Kawabata Evaluation System; FAST; standards and norms
UNIT IV TESTING OF SERVICEABILITY OF FABRIC 9
Test procedure - abrasion resistance, pilling resistance, stiffness, drape ability, crease recovery,
wrinkle recovery, air permeability; skew and bowness standards and norms
UNIT V FABRIC INSPECTION AND GARMENT QUALITY 9
Fabric defects – inspection and grading, acceptable quality level; quality assessment of garments -
cutting, sewing, pressing, finishing and packaging defects; standards
102
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the importance and test procedure for various fibres and its properties
CO2: Discuss the testing of various yarn properties
CO3: Describe various test procedure for fabric mechanical and aesthetic related properties
CO4: Explain the test procedure for determining low stress mechanical properties of fabric
CO5: Discuss the fabric inspection and quality assessments of garment
TEXTBOOKS
1. Booth J.E., “Principle of Textile Testing”, Butterworth Publications, London, 1989, ISBN:
0592063259 | ISBN-13: 9780592063256.
2. Kothari V. K., “Progress in Textiles: Science & Technology Vol 1 Testing & Quality
Management”, IAFL Publications, New Delhi, 1999, ISBN: 819010330X | ISBN-13:
9788190103305
REFERENCS
1. Seville B.P., “Physical Testing of Textiles”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1999, ISBN:
1855733676 | ISBN-13: 9781855733671.
2. Ruth E.Glock., and Grace I. Kunz., “Apparel Manufacturing – Sewn Product Analysis
FourthEdition”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005, ISBN: 0131119826 / ISBN: 978-0131119826
3. Pradip V. Mehta P.E., and Satish K. Bhardwaj., “Managing Quality in the Apparel Industry”,
National Institute of Fashion Technology, India 1998, ISBN: 8122411665 | ISBN-13:
9788122411669
4. Sara J. Kadolph., “Quality Assurance for Textiles and Apparels”, Fair child Publications,
New York, 2007, ISBN: 1563675544 | ISBN-13: 9781563675546.
5. Slater K., “Physical Testing and Quality Control”, The Textile Institute, Vol.23, No.1/2/3
Manchester, 1993, ISBN: 187081245X | ISBN-13: 9781870812450.

103
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Explain the importance and test
CO1 procedure for various fibres and its 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
properties
Discuss the testing of various yarn
CO2 properties 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Describe various test procedure for
CO3 fabric mechanical and aesthetic 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
related properties
Explain the test procedure for
CO4 determining low stress mechanical 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
properties of fabric
Discuss the fabric inspection and
CO5 quality assessments of garment 3 3 2 3 2 - - 2 - - - 1 3 1 2
Overall CO 3 3 2 3 2 - - 2 - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

104
HT3501 FABRIC STRUCTURE II LTPC
3 0 2 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand the concept of multi-layer fabrics and their production.
 To enable the students to construct weave, draft, peg plan for the production of compound
and complex structures.
 To enable the students to design preparation for complex fabrics.
 To enable the students to furnish the data required for reproduction of simple and compound
figured fabrics
UNIT I CORDED AND RIB STRUCTURES 9
Bedford cord weaves – salient features, plain faced Bedford cord (regular and alternate pick
principle), twill faced bed ford cord, wadded bed ford cord, and crepon Bedford cords. Welt &
Pique structures – salient features and manufacturing techniques, ordinary structure, wadded
structure (loose back and fast back); Difference between welts and piques, Difference between
Bedford cord and welt. Design, draft, denting, peg/tie-up plan and thread interlacing diagram of
above weaves.

UNIT II DOUBLE LAYER CLOTH AND ITS TYPES 9

Double cloth – classification, Step by step construction of self-stitched double cloth, reversible and
non-reversible varieties using twill, sateen and satin; Centre stitched double cloth; double width
plain cloth, plain Tubular cloth. Thread interchanging double cloth warp thread interchanging
double cloth ,weft thread interchanging double cloth, Cloth interchanging double cloth using plain
and twill weaves; Stripes and check effects using cloth interchanging principle; wadded double
cloth – warp wadding and weft wadding. Design, draft, denting, peg/tie-up plan and thread
interlacing diagram of above weaves.

UNIT III TREBLE CLOTH AND BACKED CLOTH 9

Treble width plain cloth – interlacement diagram and its graphical representation; Treble cloth
using twill, satin, and sateen. Backed cloths- warp & weft backed cloths-warp wadded and weft
wadded backed cloth-Reversible and non-reversible using twill, sateen and satin - Imitation
backed cloth, imitation warp and weft backed cloths. Design, draft, denting, peg/tie-up and thread
interlacing diagram of above weaves.

UNIT IV COMPOUND WEAVE STRUCTURE- PILE WEAVE 9

Pile fabrics – Salient features, classification of pile fabrics- loop pile and cut pile; warp pile and
weft pile. Terry piles – salient features, terry mechanism; classification of terry pile structures – 3
pick, 4 pick, 5 pick and 6 pick terry, graphical representation and thread interlacement diagram.
Basic principles and weaves of warp pile fabrics produced with the aid of wires and face to face
weaving. Construction of Weft pile designs - Construct Plain back, Twill back pile designs, Corded
velveteen- design, draft, denting, peg plan, tie-up and thread interlacing diagram of above weaves.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO COMPLEX WEAVES AND TRADITIONAL HANDLOOM

FABRICS 9
Principles of Cross weaving-Various types of sheds formed in cross weaving – Construction of
plain gauze & leno – Drafting, lifting plan, thread diagram & graphical representation. Construction
of extra warp and extra weft designs - Importance of extra warp and extra weft figuring in
ornamentation of fabrics. Study of traditional handloom fabrics of India – Kancheepuram sarees,
Banaras sarees and brocades, Jamdhani, Paithani, Himroo, Chanderi, Patola and Pochampalli
sarees.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS (45L + 30P)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Design development on graph paper and card punching procedures for reproduction of figured
single cloth
105
2. Design development on graph paper and card punching procedures for reproduction of figured
double cloth with 2 colour effect
3. Design development on graph paper and card punching procedures for reproduction of figured
double cloth with 4 colour effect
4. Design development on graph paper and card punching procedures for reproduction of figured
extra warp fabric
5. Design development on graph paper and card punching procedures for reproduction of figured
extra weft fabric
6. Design development on graph paper and card and punching procedures for reproduction of
figured terry structures.

OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1 Sketch corded and rib structures using basic weaves
CO2 Create double cloth structures using different methods
CO3 Construct treble cloth and backed cloth structures
CO4 Select different weaves to produce compound fabric structures
CO5 Develop the designs for complex fabric structures
CO6 Draw designs for different varieties of figured and compound fabrics with colour combination
for its reproduction

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS

1. Lab Desks - 15 Nos.
2. Card punching machines - 4 Nos.
3. Lacing stand - 2 Nos.
4. Handloom with Jacquard - 5 Nos.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grosicki Z. J., “Watson’s Textile Design and Colour”, Vol.1, Woodhead Publications,
Cambridge England, 2004.
2. Grosicki Z. J., “Watson’s Advanced Textile Design and Colour”, Vol.II, Butterworths,
London, 1989.
3. Grammar of Textile Design by H. NISBET, F.T.I.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Wilson J., “Handbook of Textile Design”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001.
2. Horne C.E., “Geometric Symmetry in Patterns and Tilings”, Textile Institute, Manchester,
2000.
3. Seyam A. M., “Structural Design of Woven Fabrics, Theory and Practice”, Textile Institute,
Manchester, 2002.
4. Georner D, “Woven Structure and Design, part 1: Single Cloth Construction”,WIRA, U.K.,
1986.
5. Georner D, “Woven Structure and Design, Part 2: Compound Structures”, WIRA, U.K.,
1989.

106
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Sketch corded and rib structures using
CO1 basic weaves 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
Create double cloth structures using
CO2 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
different methods
Construct treble cloth and backed cloth
CO3 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
structures
Select different weaves to produce
CO4 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
compound fabric structures
Develop the designs for complex fabric
CO5 structures 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3 3
Draw designs for different varieties of
CO6 figured and compound fabrics with 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
colour combination for its reproduction
Overall CO 3 2.17 3 1 1 - 1 - 2 1.16 2 2 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

107
TT3581 TESTING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students practically learn various fibre, yarn and fabric evaluation procedures
to determine characteristics of fibres, yarn and fabric

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Determination of
1. Fibre fineness, length and maturity
2. Fibre trash content, Bundle fibre strength
3. Sliver/roving/ yarn linear density
4. Single yarn strength and Yarn Lea strength
5. Yarn single and ply yarn twist
6. Unevenness of yarn and assessment of yarn appearance
7. Fabric tensile strength,
8. Fabric tear and bursting strength
9. Fabric flexural rigidity, bending modulus and crease recovery
10. Drapeability, skew and bowness of fabric
11. Fabric abrasion and pilling resistance
12. Fabric air permeability
13. Fabric weight, thickness and dimensional stability
14. Seam strength and seam slippage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO 1: Measure important characteristics of fibre and yarn
CO2: Determine the important characteristics of fabrics
CO3: Measure the seam strength and slippage of garment

108
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
CO1 Measure important characteristics 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
of fibre and yarn 3 3 3
CO2 Determine the important 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
characteristics of fabrics 3 3 3
Measure the seam strength and 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 slippage of garment 3 3 3

Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

109
HT3511 TEXTILE DESIGN AND CAD LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVE:
To Train the Students in different kinds of designing software and the CATD system.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Creation of design using paint shop pro.
2. Creation of design using Adobe Photoshop.
3. Creation of design using Corel draw.
4. Creation of design using Digibunai software
4. Conversation of vector image into Raster image.
5. Creation of dobby designs using CATD software.
6. Creation of Jacquard designs using CATD software.
7. Creation of printing designs using CATD software.
8. Extraction of design from the given cloth sample using CATD software.
9. Extraction of design from the given paper painted design sample using CATD software
10. Enlargement of design in suitable form for electronic card punching machine using CATD
software.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Recognise the application of computer in the field of textile designing
CO2: Creation of designs for various textile fabrics using paint shop pro, Adobe Photoshop and
Corel draw
CO3: Creation of designs for various textile fabrics using CATD softwares.

110
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Recognise the application of
CO1 computer in the field of textile 3 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 3
designing
Creation of designs for various textile
CO2 fabrics using paint shop pro, Adobe 3 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 3
Photoshop and Corel draw
Creation of designs for various textile 3 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO3 fabrics using CATD software.
Overall CO 3 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 1 1 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

111
 SEMESTER VI
TT3651 CHEMICAL PROCESSING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS II LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the color science, finishing, theory of dyeing and
printing of woven fabrics, knitted fabrics and garments

UNIT I METHODS OF PRINTING 9

Hand, screen, roller, rotary, inkjet, digital and transfer printing; features and limitations of different
methods of printing; constituents of printing paste; printing with direct, reactive, acid, basic and
disperse dyes.

UNIT II STYLES OF PRINTING 9

Printing with pigments; styles of Printing: Direct, Discharge and Resist Styles; After Treatment:
Steamers , Agers , Curing process.

UNIT III FINISHING 9

Introduction and classification of finishing; Calendering, Sanforising, compacting, Coating and
lamination; wool and garment finishing.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONAL FINISHES 9

Water and oil repellent finishes; crease proofing; flame retardant finish; antibacterial finish; soil
release finishes, UV resistant finishes; bio-polishing; assessment of finishes; safety measures to
be taken at the textile chemical processing industry.

UNIT V TEXTILE EFFLUENT TREATMENT 9

Analysis of Textile Effluents: BOD, COD, TDS, PPM, SS and pH; Effluent treatment process -
Primary, secondary and tertiary treatment; zero discharge treatments and standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand various methods of printing for different textile fibre material
CO2: Distinguish various styles of printing.
CO3: Classify various finishing of textile fabrics with detailed application techniques.
CO4: Apply various functional finishes to the textile fabrics.
CO5: Review the effluents of textiles and their treatments.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Shah H.S., and Gandhi R.S., “Instrumental Colour Measurement and Computer Aided
Colour Matching for Textiles”, Mahajan Book Publication, 1990, ISBN: 8185401004 / ISBN:
9788185401003
2. Choudhury A.K.R., “Modern concepts of colour and Appearance”, Oxford and IBH publishing
Ltd., 2000, ISBN: 1578080789 | ISBN-13: 9781578080786
3. Gulrajani M.L.(Ed.)., “Colour Measurement - Principles, advances and industrial
applications'', Wood head Publishing Ltd, 2010, ISBN: 1845695593 | ISBN-13:
9781845695590
4. Heywood D,“Textile Finishing”, Wood head Publishing Ltd., 2003, ISBN 090195681.

REFERENCES
1. Schindler W.D and Hauser P., “Chemical Finishing of Textiles”., Wood head Publications,
ISBN: 1855739054
2. Yin-Ling Lam , Chi-Wai Kan & Chun-Wah Marcus Yuen, " Developments in functional

112
 finishing of cotton fibres – wrinkle-resistant, flame retardant and antimicrobial treatments",
Textile Progress, Vol. 44, Nos. 3-4, Septembr-December 2012, 175–249
3. Shenai V. A., “Technology of Printing”, Sevak Publications, Mumbai, 1996.
4. Miles W. C., “Textile Printing”, Wood head Publication, 2003, ISBN 0 901956 76 1.
5. Jones B. W., “Garment Dyeing: Ready to Wear Fashion from the Dyehouse”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 19, No. 2, 1988, ISBN 1870812131.
6. Roshan Paul (Ed.)., “Denim – Manufacture Finishing and Applications”, Wood head
Publishing, 2015, ISBN: 0857098438 | ISBN-13: 9780857098436

113
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Understand various methods of
CO1 printing for different textile fibre 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2
material
CO2 Distinguish various styles of printing 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Classify various finishing of
CO3 textile fabrics with detailed 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2
application techniques
Apply various functional finishes to
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2
the textile fabrics
Review the effluents of textiles and
CO5 their treatments 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2

Overall CO 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

114
TT3691 TECHNOLOGY OF NONWOVEN LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about the fundamentals of bonded fabrics and different
method of web formation and bonding
UNIT I WEB FORMATION 9
Definitions and classification of bonded fabrics; web formation – dry and wet method of production,
fibre requirements; web laying – types, influence on web structure and nonwoven properties;
quality control of web
UNIT II MECHANICAL BONDING 9
Bonded fabric production by mechanical bonding - needling, stitching, water-jet consolidation;
factors influencing the properties; applications
UNIT III CHEMICAL AND THERMAL BONDING 9
Chemical bonding – binder polymers and bonding technologies; thermal bonding technologies;
factors influencing the properties; applications
UNIT IV POLYMER–LAID WEB AND FABRIC FORMATION 9
Manufacture of spun bonded fabrics, fibre orientation in spun bonded fabrics and characterization
of filament arrangement; manufacture of melt blown fabrics – fibre formation and attenuation;
effect of processing parameters on fabric characteristics; applications
UNIT V FINISHING AND CHARACTERIZATION OF BONDED FABRICS 9
Dry and wet finishing; characterization – tensile, tear, bursting, thickness, abrasion, puncture,
permeability, porosity; safety measures to be taken at the nonwoven industry
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the basics of nonwoven web formation techniques
CO2: Discuss the mechanical bonding technique to produce nonwovens
CO3: Explain the chemical and thermal bonding methods to produce nonwovens and their end
uses
CO4: Discuss the production of spun bonded and melt blown nonwoven fabrics.
CO5: Explain the finishing and characterization of bonded fabrics

TEXTBOOKS
1. Lunenschloss J., Albrecht W. and David Sharp., “Nonwoven Bonded Fabrics”, Ellis
HorwoodLtd., New York, 1985, ISBN: 0-85312-636-4.
2. Mrstina V. and Feigl F., “Needle Punching Textile Technology”, Elsevier, New York,
1990,ISBN: 0444988041 | ISBN-13: 9780444988041
REFERENCES
1. Dharmadhikary R. K., Gilmore T. F., Davis H. A. and Batra S. K., “Thermal Bonding of
Nonwoven Fabrics”, Textile Progress, Vol.26, No.2, Textile Institute Manchester, 1995,
ISBN:1870812786.
2. Jirsak O. and Wadsworth L. C., “Nonwoven Textiles”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1999,
ISBN: 0 89089 9788.
3. Russell S., “Hand Book of Nonwovens”, Textile Institute, Manchester, 2004,
ISBN:1855736039.
4. Chapman R., “Applications of Nonwovens in Technical Textiles”, Textile Institute,
Manchester, 2010, ISBN: 1 84569 4376
5. Abhijit Majumdar, Apurba Das, R.Alagirusamy and V.K.Kothari., “Process Control in Textile
Manufacturing”, Wood Head Publishing Limited, Oxford, 2013, ISBN: 978-0-85709-027-0.

115
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain the basics of nonwoven web
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
formation techniques
Discuss the mechanical bonding
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
technique to produce nonwovens
Explain the chemical and thermal
CO3 bonding methods to produce 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
nonwovens and their end uses
Discuss the production of spun
CO4 bonded and melt blown nonwoven 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
fabrics
Explain the finishing and
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
characterization of bonded fabrics

Overall CO 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

116
 NCC Credit Course Level 3*
NX3651 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course - III LT P C
30 0 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2

ARMED FORCES 3
AF 2 Modes of Entry to Army, CAPF, Police 3
COMMUNICATION 3
C1 Introduction to Communication & Latest Trends 3
INFANTRY 3
INF 1 Organisation of Infantry Battalion & its weapons 3
MILITARY HISTORY 23
MH 1 Biographies of Renowned Generals 4
MH 2 War Heroes - PVC Awardees 4
MH 3 Study of Battles - Indo Pak War 1965, 1971 & Kargil 9
MH 4 War Movies 6

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 3*

NX3652 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course – III L T P C
3 0 0 3
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
NO 3 Modes of Entry - IN, ICG, Merchant Navy 3
AF 2 Naval Expeditions & Campaigns 3
NAVAL COMMUNICATION 2
NC 1 Introduction to Naval Communications 1
NC 2 Semaphore 1
NAVIGATION 2
N1 Navigation of Ship - Basic Requirements 1
N2 Chart Work 1
SEAMANSHIP 15
MH 1 Introduction to Anchor Work 2
MH 2 Rigging Capsule 6
MH 3 Boatwork - Parts of Boat 2
117
MH 4 Boat Pulling Instructions 2
MH 5 Whaler Sailing Instructions 3
FIRE FIGHTING FLOODING & DAMAGE CONTROL 4
FFDC 1 Fire Fighting 2
FFDC 2 Damage Control 2
SHIP MODELLING 3
SM Ship Modelling Capsule 3
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 3*

NX3653 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - III LTPC
300 3
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
AIRMANSHIP 1
A1 Airmanship 1
BASIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 3
FI 1 Basic Flight Instruments 3
AERO MODELLING 3
AM 1 Aero Modelling Capsule 3
GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 2
GSK 4 Latest Trends & Acquisitions 2
AIR CAMPAIGNS 6
AC 1 Air Campaigns 6
PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 6
PF 1 Principles of Flight 3
PF 2 Forces acting on Aircraft 3
NAVIGATION 5
NM 1 Navigation 2
NM 2 Introduction to Met and Atmosphere 3
AERO ENGINES 6
E1 Introduction and types of Aero Engine 3
E2 Aircraft Controls 3

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

118
 TT3661 TEXTILE CHEMICAL PROCESSING LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the student to gain knowledge in quantitative analysis, pre-
treatment, dyeing and printing of textile materials.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Desizing of cotton fabrics
2. Scouring of cotton yarn / fabric
3. Peroxide bleaching of cotton yarn /fabric
4. Dyeing of cotton yarn using reactive dyes (cold / hot brands)
5. Dyeing of cotton yarn using Vat dyes
6. Degumming and bleaching of silk yarn
7. Dyeing of silk yarn with acid dyes / Reactive dyes
8. Dyeing of polyester yarn using Disperse dye
9. Printing of cotton fabrics with Pigments by Direct style using Blocks / screens
10. Printing of polyester fabrics with Disperse dyes by Direct style using Blocks / Screens
11. Determination of wash and rubbing fastness of dyed yarn/fabrics
12. Printing of cotton fabric by resist style (Batik printing , tie and dye) using Reactive cold
brand / cold dyeing Vat dyes
13. Determination of whiteness and yellowness index using computer color matching
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to,
CO1: Desize, scour and bleach cotton yarn / fabric
CO2: Dye different yarn / fabric with different types of colorants and determine the
different fastness
CO 3: Print different fabric with different types of colorants by different styles

119
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Desize, scour and bleach
CO1 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
cotton yarn / fabric
Dye different yarns / fabrics
with different types of
CO2 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
colorants and determine
the different fastness
Print different fabrics with
CO3 different types of colorants by 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 3 1 3
different styles
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 3 1 2.33

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

120
TT3611 TEXTILE PRODUCT ENGINEERING LABORATORY L TPC
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to test and analyse the given product that include identification of fibre,
yarn, sourcing of raw materials and accessories, fabric specifications, method of production of
same and costing

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Reverse engineering of textile products with an emphasis on testing protocols – Two each for a
student
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Identify the materials used in the product
CO2: Carryout confirmative tests to identify specifications of materials used
CO3: Suggest the production process required to make the product
CO4: Costing of product

121
Course Articulation Matrix

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PSO
Outcomes PO1 PO2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 3
Identify the materials used in the
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
product
Carryout confirmative tests to
CO2 identify specifications of materials 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
used
Suggest the production process
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
required to make the product
CO4 Costing of product 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

122
HT3711 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING / INTERNSHIP II## LTPC
000 1
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Get connected with industry/ laboratory/research institute
 Get practical knowledge on production process in the industry and develop skills to solve
related problems
 Develop skills to carry out research in the research institutes/laboratories

The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories for
the specified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be submitted
within ten days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be evaluated as per
the Regulations.
No.of. Weeks: 02
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student will know about
CO1: Plant layout, machinery, organizational structure and production processes in the firm or
research facilities in the laboratory/research institute
CO2: Analysis of industrial / research problems and their solutions
CO3: Documenting of material specifications, machine and process parameters, testing
parameters and results
CO4: Preparing of Technical report and presentation

SEMESTER VII
TT3751 APPAREL AND HOME FURNISHINGS MANUFACTURE LTPC
3 0 2 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting, sewing,
pressing, inspection of garment and home furnishing items.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and functional divisions of an apparel industry; Anthropometry, Technical
specification sheet for basic styles, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting,
grading; Marker planning- requirements and marker planning efficiency.

UNIT II CUTTING, SEAMS AND STITCHES 9

Spreading-types of Spreading, manual, semi automatic and fully automatic machines; Cutting-
requirements, Hand shears, straight knife, band knife, die, laser, plasma, water jet and ultra
sonic cutting machines; computer controlled cutting machines. Different types of seams and
stitches- properties; Needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint, Sewing thread-
construction, material, thread size, packages.

UNIT III SEWING MACHINES 9

Sewing machine- fundamental and Classification. Parts, functions and threading diagram of
Single needle lock stitch machine, over lock machines and Flat lock machines. Introduction to
Special purpose sewing machines - Feed off Arm, button hole sewing, button sewing, bar tack
and blind stitch machines.

UNIT IV PRESSING AND ACCESSORIES 9

Steaming and pressing- garment pressing - categories and equipment, packing; Trims - Brand,
size and care label; Accessories - linings, interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop
fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and laces, zip fasteners and buttons.
123
UNIT V TEXTILE FURNISHING 9
Textile furnishing- Introduction, types, selection of fibers, fabric design and structure. Application
– floor coverings, curtains, draperies, towels, bed linens and kitchen textiles.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS (45L + 30P)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Construction of seams for various applications.
2. Construction of stitches for various applications.
3. Study of button hole making and button stitching machines.
4. Drafting and construction of basic T - shirt.
5. Drafting and construction of basic skirt.
6. Drafting and construction of baby frock.

OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Explain pattern making, grading and marker planning
CO2: Demonstrate the spreading and cutting process, and classify the stitches and seams for
various applications
CO3: Discuss the functions of various sewing machines
CO4: Elaborate on garment pressing, packing, trims and accessories
CO5: Explain various types of furnishing materials and applications
CO6: Select the appropriate seams and stitches for various end uses.
CO7: Construct basic T shirt, basic skirt and baby frock

TEXTBOOKS
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science
Ltd., Oxford, 1994, ISBN: 0632037482.
2. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 2004, ISBN:
1405102780 | ISBN-13: 9781405102780
3. Subrata Das., Performance of Home Textiles, Wood head Publishing India PVT. LTD,
2010.

REFERENCES
1. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985.
2. Gerry Cooklin., Steven George Hayes., and John McLoughlin, “Introduction to
Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Scientific Publications, London, 2006, ISBN:
0632058463 | ISBN13: 9780632058464.
3. Jai Prakash., and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994.
4. Ruth E. Glock., and Grace I. Kunz., “Apparel Manufacturing – Sewn Product Analysis”
4th Edition, Upper Sadle River Publications, New York, 2004. ISBN: 0131119826 |
ISBN-13: 9780131119826
5. Pradip V. Mehta., “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992, ISBN: B015X4YG

124
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain pattern making, grading,
CO1 marker planning, spreading and 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
cutting
Demonstrate the spreading and
cutting process, and classify the
CO2 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
stitches and seams for various
applications
Discuss the functions of various sewing
CO3 machines 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
Elaborate on garment pressing,
CO4 packing, trims and accessories 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
Analyze the various types of furnishing
CO5 materials and applications 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
Select the appropriate seams and
CO6 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
stitches for various end uses.
Construct basic T shirt, basic skirt and
CO7 baby frock 3 3 3 - 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Overall CO 3 1.57 2.28 2 1 - - - 2 2 2 1.28 2.28 2.28 2.28

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

125
TT3752 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT FOR TEXTILE INDUSTRIES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to understand
 Basics of financial management which are required for the textile industry
 Determination of cost of yarn, fabric and garment

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING 9

Costing - concepts; costing types; different methods of costing, standard costing, analysis of
variance; classification of costs; preparation of cost sheet; cost profit volume analysis, breakeven
analysis

UNIT II COST ACCOUNTING FOR TEXTILE INDUSTRY 9

Costing of yarn, fabrics and Garments; tax structure

UNIT III INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND DEPRECIATION ACCOUNTING 9

Techniques of investment analysis – payback period method, accounting rate of return,
Discounted Cash Flow methods - IRR, NPV, PI; Depreciation – method of computing depreciation

UNIT IV CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND BUDGETING 9

Capital structure; sources and cost of capital; working capital management; Budget, types of
budgets, budgeting and control in textile industry

UNIT V FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 9

Tools for financial analysis and control- profit and loss account, balance sheet; financial ratio
analysis - illustrations from textile industry
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the types and methods of costing, and preparation of cost sheet
CO2: Determine the cost of yarn, fabrics and garments
CO3: Carryout investment appraisal and calculate depreciation
CO4: Describe the different sources and cost of capital, and preparation of budget
CO5: Analyze and interpret the financial statements of textile company

TEXTBOOKS
1. Pandey I. M., “Financial Management”,Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 10 th
Edition, 2010, ISBN: 8125937145 / ISBN: 9788125937142.
2. Bhave P.V., and Srinivasan V., “Costing Accounting to Textile Mills”, ATIRA, Ahmadabad, 1976

REFERENCES
1. Thukaram Rao M.E., “Cost and Management Accounting” NewAge International, Bangalore,
2004, ISBN: 812241513X / ISBN: 978-8122415131.
2. Thukaram Rao M.E., “Cost Accounting and Financial Management” New Age International,
Bangalore, 2004, ISBN: 8122415148/ ISBN: 978-8122415148.
3. Prasanna Chandra., “Financial Management - Theory and Practice”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2011, ISBN :0071078401 / ISBN: 0071078401.62
4. James C. Vanhorne., “Financial Management and Policy”, Pearson Education Asia (Low Priced
Edition) 12th Edition, 2002, ISBN: 0130326577 | ISBN-13: 9780130326577.
5. Narang, G. B. S., and Kumar V., “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
1988, ISBN: 8174092897 | ISBN-13: 9788174092892

126
6. Aswat Damodaran., “Corporate Finance Theory and Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, 2001,ISBN:
0471283320 | ISBN-13: 9780471283324.
7. Hrishikes Bhattacharya., “Working Capital Management, Strategies and Techniques”, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2014, ISBN: 8120349040 | ISBN-13: 9788120349049.
8. Khan and Jain, “Basic Financial Management and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,7th
Edition, 2014, ISBN: 933921305X / ISBN: 978-9339213053.
9. Kantwala D.N., “Costing and Cost Control – A Marginal Approach for Textile Industry”, Texcons,
Bombay, 1977.

127
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain the types and methods of
CO1 costing, and preparation of cost 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
sheet
Determine the cost of yarn, fabrics
CO2 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
and garments
Carryout investment appraisal and
CO3 calculate depreciation 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
Describe the different sources and
CO4 cost of capital, and preparation of 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
budget
Analyze and interpret the financial
CO5 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1
statements of textile company
Overall CO 3 3 1 2 2 - - - - 2 2 1 3 2 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

128
GE3791 HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS LTPC
2 0 0 2
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course aims to provide a broad understanding about the modern values and ethical principles
that have evolved and are enshrined in the Constitution of India with regard to the democratic,
secular and scientific aspects. The course is designed for undergraduate students so that they
could study, understand and apply these values in their day to day life.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness about values and ethics enshrined in the Constitution of India
 To sensitize students about the democratic values to be upheld in the modern society.
 To inculcate respect for all people irrespective of their religion or other affiliations.
 To instill the scientific temper in the students’ minds and develop their critical thinking.
 To promote sense of responsibility and understanding of the duties of citizen.

UNIT I DEMOCRATIC VALUES 6

Understanding Democratic values: Equality, Liberty, Fraternity, Freedom, Justice, Pluralism,
Tolerance, Respect for All, Freedom of Expression, Citizen Participation in Governance – World
Democracies: French Revolution, American Independence, Indian Freedom Movement.
Reading Text: Excerpts from John Stuart Mills’ On Liberty

UNIT II SECULAR VALUES 6

Understanding Secular values – Interpretation of secularism in Indian context - Disassociation of
state from religion – Acceptance of all faiths – Encouraging non-discriminatory practices.

Reading Text: Excerpt from Secularism in India: Concept and Practice by Ram Puniyani

UNIT III SCIENTIFIC VALUES 6

Scientific thinking and method: Inductive and Deductive thinking, Proposing and testing
Hypothesis, Validating facts using evidence based approach – Skepticism and Empiricism –
Rationalism and Scientific Temper.

Reading Text: Excerpt from The Scientific Temper by Antony Michaelis R

UNIT IV SOCIAL ETHICS 6

Application of ethical reasoning to social problems – Gender bias and issues – Gender violence –
Social discrimination – Constitutional protection and policies – Inclusive practices.

Reading Text: Excerpt from 21 Lessons for the 21st Century by Yuval Noah Harari

UNIT V SCIENTIFIC ETHICS 6

Transparency and Fairness in scientific pursuits – Scientific inventions for the betterment of
society - Unfair application of scientific inventions – Role and Responsibility of Scientist in the
modern society.

Reading Text: Excerpt from American Prometheus: The Triumph and Tragedy of J.Robert
Oppenheimer by Kai Bird and Martin J. Sherwin.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. The Nonreligious: Understanding Secular People and Societies, Luke W. Galen Oxford
University Press, 2016.
2. Secularism: A Dictionary of Atheism, Bullivant, Stephen; Lee, Lois, Oxford University Press,
2016.
129
3. The Oxford Handbook of Secularism, John R. Shook, Oxford University Press, 2017.
4. The Civic Culture: Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five Nations by Gabriel A. Almond and
Sidney Verba, Princeton University Press,
5. Research Methodology for Natural Sciences by Soumitro Banerjee, IISc Press, January 2022

COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1 : Identify the importance of democratic, secular and scientific values in harmonious
functioning of social life
CO2 : Practice democratic and scientific values in both their personal and professional life.
CO3 : Find rational solutions to social problems.
CO4 : Behave in an ethical manner in society
CO5 : Practice critical thinking and the pursuit of truth.

130
 HT3811 PROJECT WORK / INTERNSHIP# LT P C
0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVES:
To train the students in
 Identifying problem and developing the structured methodology to solve the identified
problem in the industry or research problem at research Institution or college.
 Conducting experiments, analyze and discuss the test results, and make conclusions.
 Preparing project reports and presentation

The students shall individually / or as group work on a specific topic approved by the
Department. The student can select any topic which is relevant to his/her specialization of the
programme. The student should continue the work on the selected topic as per the formulated
methodology. At the end of the semester, after completing the work to the satisfaction of the
supervisor and review committee, a detailed report which contains clear definition of the
identified problem, detailed literature review related to the area of work and methodology for
carrying out the work, results and discussion, conclusion and references should be prepared as
per the format prescribed by the University and submitted to the Head of the department. The
students will be evaluated based on the report and viva-voce examination by a panel of
examiners as per the Regulations.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the project, the student will be able to
CO1: Formulate and analyze problem / create a new product/ process.
CO2: Design and conduct experiments to find solution
CO3: Analyze the results and provide solution for the identified problem, prepare project report
and make presentation

131
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

Spinning and Weaving

CTT343 PROCESS AND QUALITY CONTROL IN SPINNING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand
 Quality aspects of raw materials
 Process control measures in spinning
 Productivity limits of spinning machinery

UNIT I RAW MATERIAL SELECTION AND CONTROL 9

Quality – definition, tools of quality control. Quality management in spinning industry. Fibre
selection – Application of High volume instrument and Spinning consistency Index on fibre
selection. Bale management techniques.

UNIT II CONTROL OF WASTE, NEPS AND FIBRE RUPTURE 9

Yarn realization – Factors influencing the yarn realization. Control of waste in blow room, card
comber and ring frame - Influence of machine and process parameters on waste removal.
Assessment of intensity of opening and cleaning. Control of Nep generation and fibre rupture in
blow room. Improving the nep removal in carding and combing machines.

UNIT III YARN QUALITY ANALYSIS AND CONTROL 9

Control of count, strength and its variation. Control of yarn hairiness. Control of yarn evenness and
imperfections. Principle of auto-levellers and their influence on yarn count variation, evenness.
Interpretation and analysis of diagram, spectrogram and V- L curve. Case Studies

UNIT IV PROCESS CONTROL IN SPINNING OF SYNTHETIC FIBRES AND BLENDS 9

Synthetic fibre characteristics, blend proportion and their influence on yarn quality. Blending of
synthetic fibres – selection of fibres, methods of blending. Assessment of homogeneity of fibre
blends and its influence on yarn quality. Selection of machine elements process parameters and
machine settings for processing of synthetic fibres and blends in short staple spinning system.
Spinning of dyed fibres. Norms for man-made fibre and blended yarns.

UNIT V PRODUCTIVITY ANALYSIS 9

Productivity indices- machine productivity and labour productivity. Factors affecting the production
limits of the spinning machinery. Effect of R.H, temperature and condition of machines on
productivity. Control of end breaks in ring spinning. Balancing of spinning machinery. Yarn defects,
yarn faults and package faults - classification, assessment, causes and remedies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will know,
CO1: Selection of raw material with optimum quality for spinning industry
CO2: Improving of yarn realization by minimization of process waste and setting optimal process
parameters.
CO3: Control of Count, strength, hairiness, evenness and imperfections and analysis of
quality charts
CO 4: Measures to be taken while processing manmade fibres and blends
CO 5: Method of computation of productivity indices and improve yarn productivity by proper
machine balancing and maintaining parameters

132
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Thilagavathi G & Karthik T, "Process control and yarn quality in spinning", Woodhead
Publishing India, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Garde A R and Subramanian T A, "Process Control in Spinning", ATIRA, Ahmedabad, 1989.

REFERENCES:
1. Majumdar, Das, Alagirusamy, Kothari, "Process control in textile manufacturing", Woodhead
Publishing, UK, 2012.
2. Ratnam T V. and Chellamani. K. P., "Quality Control in Spinning", SITRA, Coimbatore, 1999.
3. K.R.Salhotra, "Spinning of manmade fibres and blends on cotton system", 3rd Edition, TAI
PUBLICATIONS, Mumbai, India, 2004.
4. Senthilkumar R, "Process Management in Spinning", CRC Press, UK, 2019.

133
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Selection of raw material with optimize
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
quality for spinning industry
Improving ofn yarn realization by
CO2 minimization of process waste and setting 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
optimal process parameters.
Control of Count, strength, hairiness,
CO3 evenness and imperfections and analysis 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
of quality charts
Measures to be taken while processing
CO4 manmade fibres and blends 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Method of computation of productivity indices
and improve yarn productivity by proper
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
machine balancing and maintaining
parameters
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

134
CTT342 PROCESS AND QUALITY CONTROL IN FABRIC MANUFACTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand;
 Process control measures in weaving preparatory to meet the required yarn quality
 Factors influencing loom production efficiency

UNIT I PROCESS CONTROL IN WINDING, PIRN WINDING 9

Importance and considerations for evolving a system of process control. Winding - Quality of Knots
and Splices - Quality of package - Winding Performance & Productivity - Control of Hard Waste -
Material Handling. Ambient Conditions. Pirn Winding- Improving Build of Pirn - Productivity. Yarn
Quality requirements for shuttle and shuttleless looms.

UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL IN WARPING 9

Warping and Sectional Warping - Performance - Process Parameters and Productivity. Minimizing
End breaks - Quality of Warper's Beam - Control of Hard Waste - Material Handling – Beam Count

UNIT III PROCESS CONTROL IN SIZING 9

Choice of Size Recipe - Control of Size Pick Up - Yarn Stretch and Moisture. Quality of Sized
Beam. Control of Hard Waste - Missing Ends - Dead loss - Productivity.

UNIT IV DRAWING-IN AND WARP TYEING 9

Quality of Weaver's beam. Control of Cross - Extra - Missing and Buried Ends. Selection and Care
of Reeds - Healds and Drop Pins - process parameters of drawing in and Tyeing machines.

UNIT V PROCESS AND QUALITY CONTROL IN LOOM SHED 9

Loom Efficiency - Factors influencing loom efficiency - Hard Waste - Productivity. Fabric Defects
and their Control. Ambient Conditions. Grey Cloth Realization - Packing % - Benchmarking
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to,
CO1: Control productivity and quality in winding
CO2: Discuss the process control in warping
CO3: Explain the quality and process control in sizing
CO4: Control the quality in drawing-in and tyeing
CO5: Improve loom efficiency and cloth realization

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alagirusamy R, Das A, Majumdar A, Kothari V K , "Process Control in Manufacturing",
Wood Head Publishing, UK, 2012.
2. Paliwal M C and Kimothi.P D , "Process Control in Weaving", ATIRA Publication,
Ahmedabad, 1983.

REFERENCES:
1. BTRA, "Loom Shed", BTRA Publications, Mumbai, 1986.
2. BTRA, "Warping and Sizing", BTRA Publications, Mumbai, 1983.
3. BTRA, "Winding", BTRA Publications, Mumbai, 1986.

135
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Program Outcome
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Control productivity and quality in
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
winding
Discuss the process control in
CO2 warping 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Explain the quality and process
CO3 control in sizing 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Control the quality in drawing-in and
CO4 tyeing 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Improve loom efficiency and cloth
CO5 realization 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

136
CTT353 THEORY OF DRAFTING AND TWISTING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students understand the theory of drafting and twisting involved in spinning system.

UNIT I IDEAL DRAFTING 9

Ideal drafting – definition, model, conditions required in roller drafting system; deviations from ideal
drafting and actual drafting conditions; drafting wave – definition, causes, estimation, conditions to
avoid formation, role of apron in controlling drafting wave formation, limitations of apron system

UNIT II ROLLER SLIP AND ROLLER NIP MOVEMENT 9

Roller slip – definition, conditions for the formation of forward and backward slips in the roller
drafting systems, measures to avoid roller slip occurrence; causes for roller nip movement and
roller speed variation, control measures

UNIT III ROLLER VS. WIRE POINT DRAFTING 9

Comparison of roller drafting system with wire point drafting system; application of wire point
drafting in card and rotor spinning machine; comparison of roller drafting in draw frame, comber
preparatory, comber, speed frame, ring frame, and condensed yam spinning.

UNIT IV FALSE TWISTING, TWISTING IN RING FRAME 9

Principle of false twisting; fundamental requirements to create real twist in the strand; principle of
twist insertion in ring spinning; limitations of ring twisting; mechanics of balloon formed during
twisting; principle of two-for-one twisting

UNIT V TWISTING IN ALTERNATIVE SPINNING SYSTEMS 9

Principle of twist insertion in open-end spinning; application of this principle in rotor spinning and
friction spinning machines; principle of twist formation in air-jet and air-vortex spinning; principle of
twist insertion in core spinning, cover spinning and self-twist spinning.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the concept of Ideal drafting and real drafting
CO2: Explain the phenomenon of roller slip and roller nip movement
CO3: Describe the principle of wire point drafting and its comparison with roller drafting and
applications
CO4: Elucidate the fundamentals of false twisting and real twisting; twisting in ring spinning
CO5: Describe the theory of twist formation in rotor spinning, air jet and air vortex spinning
systems

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Foster G.A.R. The Principles of Roller Drafting and the Irregularity of Drafted Materials, The
Textile Institute, Manchester, 1958.
2. Lord P.R. Roller Drafting, Textile Progress, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1993.
3. Klein W., New Spinning Systems, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1993.

REFERENCES:
1. Grosberg P and lype C. Yarn Production: Theoretical Aspects, The Textile Institute,
Manchester, 1999.
2. De Barr A.E. and Catling H., The Principle and Theory of Ring Spinning, The Textile Institute,
Manchester, 1965.

137
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Program Outcome
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Describe the concept of Ideal
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
drafting and real drafting
Explain the phenomenon of roller slip
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
and roller nip movement
Describe the principle of wire point
CO3 drafting and its comparison with roller 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
drafting and applications
Elucidate the fundamentals of false
CO4 twisting and real twisting; twisting in ring 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
spinning
Describe the theory of twist formation in
CO5 rotor spinning, air jet and air vortex 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
spinning systems
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

138
CTT344 PRODUCTION AND APPLICATION OF SEWING THREADS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the requirements and production of sewing threads for different applications.
 Understand types of fancy and metallic yarns.
 Carryout tests to ensure the quality of sewing threads.
UNIT I SEWING THREAD PROPERTIES 13
Sewing threads – property requirements for different applications; ticket numbering;
characterization of sewing threads- stress–strain behaviour of sewing threads; thermal, friction
behaviour of sewing threads; sewability of the thread, seam efficiency index
UNIT II TYPES OF SEWING THREADS 13
Types of sewing thread – spun threads, core spun threads, filament threads; production,
properties and applications

UNIT III FANCY AND METALIC YARN PRODUCTION 5

Yarn folding, fancy yarns – types and production; metallic yarns

UNIT IV HIGH PERFORMANCE SEWING THREADS 9

Characteristics and application of high performance sewing threads - aramid threads, ceramic
threads, polypropylene threads, polyethylene threads, polytetra fluroethylene threads, fiberglass
threads, other sewing threads – tencel, acrylic, linen, elastic, soluble; embroidery threads
UNIT V TESTING OF SEWING THREADS 5
Physical testing of sewing threads, sewing defects – assessment and Control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Describe the characteristics of sewing thread
CO2: Explain the production of sewing thread
CO3: Discuss the manufacturing of ply and fancy yarns
CO4: Explain the characteristics of high performance sewing threads
CO5: Describe the testing and quality assurance of sewing threads
TEXTBOOKS
1. Ukponmwan J.O., Mukhopadhyay A., and Chatterjee K.N., “Sewing threads”, Textile
Progress, 2000, ISBN: 1870372387 | ISBN-13: 9781870372381.
2. Carl A Lawrence., “Fundamentals of Spun Yarn Technology”, CRC Press, Florida, USA,
2003, ISBN: 1566768217 | ISBN-13: 9781566768214
3. Carr H., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Publisher, UK, 2004, ISBN:
0632021934 | ISBN-13: 9780632021932
REFERENCES
1. Ruth E. Glock., “Apparel Manufacturing Sewn Product Analysis”, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey, 2005, ISBN: 0131119826 | ISBN-13: 9780131119826
2. Jacob Solinger., “Apparel Production Handbook”, Reinhold Publications, 1998, ISBN:
1879570009 / ISBN: 978-1879570009
3. Rao J.V., and Rajendra Kr.Gaur., “Sewing Threads: Technology, Stitches, Seams,
Problems, Needles”, NITRA, 2006.
4. Gong R.H., and Wright R.M., “Fancy yarns –Their manufacture and application”,
Woodhead Publishing Ltd, England, 2002, ISBN: 0849315506 | ISBN-13: 9780849315503.

139
Course Articulation Matrix
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PSO
Outcomes PO1 PO2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 3
Describe the characteristics of
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
sewing thread
Explain the production of sewing
CO2 thread 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Discuss the manufacturing of ply
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
and fancy yarns
Explain the characteristics of high
CO4 performance sewing threads 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Describe the testing and quality
CO5 assurance of sewing threads 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
Overall CO 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

140
CTT357 STRUCTURAL MECHANICS OF YARN AND FABRICS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students learn about the structure of ideal and real yarn, migration of fibres in
the yarn, mechanics of blended yarns.
 To impart the knowledge about breakage mechanism of various yarns, relationship
between structure and property of staple fibre yarns and continuous filaments.
 To make the students to learn and understand the geometry of woven, knitted and
nonwoven fabrics, and structure influence on the mechanical properties of woven fabric

UNIT I YARN GEOMETRY 13

Idealized helical yarn structure; yarn count and twist factors, twist contraction and retraction;
relationship between yarn parameters; Idealized packing; packing of fibers in yarns; measurement
of packing density and radial packing density of yarn; measurement of yarn diameter; ideal
migration, tracer fiber technique, characterization of migration behavior, migration in blended
yarns, mechanisms of migration, effect of various parameters on migration behavior, effect of
migration on yarn properties.

UNIT II MECHANICS OF CONTINUOUS FILAMENT YARNS 9

Analysis of tensile behavior - filament strain and yarn strain, different models; influence of yarn
parameters; prediction of breakage; analysis of yarn mechanics by energy method; observed
extension and breakage of continuous filament yarns.

UNIT III MECHANICS OF STAPLE FIBRE YARNS 5

Theoretical analysis; fiber obliquity and slippage; influence of fiber length, strength, fineness and
friction; strength prediction model for blended yarns - Hamburger's model.

UNIT IV WOVEN FABRIC GEOMETRY AND DEFORMATION 13

Elements of woven fabric geometry; Pierce and Olofsson models - form factor; jamming of
threads, cover factor; crimp interchange, degree of set; mechanics of extension behavior of woven
fabric; mechanics of other fabric deformations - shear, buckling, bending and compression; Effect
of yarn structure on woven fabric properties.

UNIT V KNITTED AND NONWOVEN STRUCTURES 5

Geometry of plain knitted structure, influence of friction on knit geometry; load extension of knitted
fabrics; Geometry of Nonwoven structure, mechanical behaviour of needle felt.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Discuss the packing of fibres and yarn structure
CO2: Analyse the continuous filament properties
CO3: Explain the staple fibre yarn’s tensile properties
CO4: Demonstrate the models proposed for geometry of woven fabrics and characteristics of
fabric on deformation
CO5: Explain the structural characteristics of knitted and nonwovens

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hearle J. W. S., “Structural Mechanics of Fibers, Yarns and Fabrics”, Wiley Interscience,
New York, 1969.
2. Jinlian Hu., “Structure and Mechanics of Woven Fabrics”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd., 2004.
3. Goswami B. C., "Textile Yarns: Technology, Structure and Applications", Wiley Interscience
– New York, 1977, ISBN: 0471319007

141
REFERENCES:
1. Hearl J. W. S., "Structural Mechanics of Fibers, Yarns and Fabrics", Wiley Inter science,
New York, 1969, ISBN: 0471366692.
2. Hearle J. W. S., John J., Thwaites. and JafargholiAmirbayat., "Mechanics of Flexible Fibre
Assemblies", Sijthoff and Noordhoff, 1980, ISBN: 902860720X.
3. Jinlian Hu., "Structure and Mechanics of Woven Fabrics", Woodhead Publishing Ltd., 2004,
ISBN: 1855739046.
4. Hassan M. Berery., "Effect of Mechanical and Physical properties on Fabrics Hand",
Woodhead publishing Ltd., 2005, ISBN: 13: 978 – 1- 85573 -9185.

142
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Discuss the packing of fibres and
CO1 yarn structure 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Analyse the continuous filament
CO2 properties. 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Explain the staple fibre yarn’s
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
tensile properties
Demonstrate the models
proposed for geometry of woven
CO4 fabrics and characteristics of 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
fabric on deformation
Explain the structural
CO5 characteristics of knitted and 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
nonwovens
Overall CO 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

143
 Chemical Processing
CTT351 TEXTILE CHEMICALS AND AUXILIARIES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
To provide knowledge on
 Classification and types of textile auxiliaries.
 Importance and basic functions of auxiliaries.
 Chemistry of textile auxiliaries

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AUXILLARIES AND SURFACTANTS 9

Auxiliaries: Importance and functions; Surfactants: Mode of action and classification of
surfactants – cationic, anionic, nonionic surfactants.

UNIT II AUXILLARIES IN PREPARATORY PROCESS 9

Auxiliaries associated with de-sizing, scouring, bleaching of cellulosic fibres, protein fibres and
synthetic fibres.

UNIT III AUXILLARIES IN DYEING PROCESS 9

Auxiliaries associated with Dyeing with Direct Dyes, Reactive, Vat, Azoic colors, Sulphur dyes,
Acid dyes, Metal complex dyes, Basic and Disperse dyes.

UNIT IV AUXILLARIES IN PRINTING PROCESS 9

Auxiliaries associated with printing: Direct Style of Printing, Discharge style of Printing, Resist
style of printing.

UNIT V AUXILLARIES IN FINISHING PROCESS 9

Auxiliaries used in Resin Finishing, Softening, Crease recovery, Water repellent, Water Proof,
Flame retardant, Soil release.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to understand
CO1: Role of auxiliaries in modification of surface tension
CO2: Role of auxiliaries in preparatory Process
CO3: Role of auxiliaries in dyeing of textiles
CO4: Role of auxiliaries in printing Process
CO5: Role of auxiliaries in finishing

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shennai.V.A, "Organic Textile Chemicals", Sevak Publication, Bombay,1995
2. Vaidya.A.A, "Chemistry of Textile auxiliaries", Wheeler Publishing, NewDelhi,1999

REFERENCES:
1. John Shore, "Colourants& Auxiliaries" Wiley and Sons Ltd, New York, Volume I &
II,1999.
2. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Woodhead
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. Shennai.V.A, "Organic Textile Chemicals", Sevak Publication, Bombay,1995
4. Vaidya.A.A, "Chemistry of Textile auxiliaries", Wheeler Publishing, NewDelhi,1999
5. W D Schindler P J Hauser., “Chemical Finishing of Textiles”, Woodhead publishing Ltd,
144
 2004.
6. Mathews Kolanjikombil.,”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted
fabrics”, Woodhead publishing India , 2021
7. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin & Co.
Ltd., U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
8. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Woodhead publishing India, 2018

145
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Role of auxiliaries in - - -
modification of surface 2 2 1 - - 2 2 - - 2 - -
tension
CO2 Role of auxiliaries in - - -
2 1 2 - - 1 2 - - 2 - -
preparatory Process
CO3 Role of - - -
auxiliaries in 2 2 1 - - 3 1 - - 2 - -
dyeing of textiles
CO4 Role of auxiliaries in - - -
2 2 1 - - 2 1 - - 2 - -
printing Process
CO5 Role of auxiliaries in - - -
finishing 3 2 1 - - 2 1 - - 2 - -
Overall CO 2.2 1.8 1.2 - - 2 1.4 - - - - - 2 - -

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

146
 Garment Manufacturing

CTT337 GARMENT PRODUCTION MACHINERY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn the machines and mechanisms of machines used for
garment production

UNIT I FABRIC INSPECTION, SPREADING AND CUTTING MACHINES 9

Fabric inspection machinery; spreading machines – manual, semi-automatic and fully automatic
machines; mechanism of straight knife, rotary, band knife, die, laser, plasma, water jet and
ultrasonic cutting machines; notches, drills and thread markers; computer interfaced cutting
machines; safety measures

UNIT II SEWING MACHINES I 9

Lock stitch and chain stitch sewing machine – types, threading, driving arrangement, function of
elements, stitch formation, timing, settings and feed mechanism; selection of machine and process
parameters for different applications; safety measures

UNIT III SEWING MACHINES II 9

Needles-geometry and types, selection; button fixing and button holing machine – mechanism and
features

UNIT IV SEWING MACHINES III 9

Overlock, flat lock, feed-off the arm, zig-zag and embroidery machines– driving arrangement,
function of elements, stitch formation, timing, settings and feed mechanism; safety measures

UNIT V FINISHING MACHINES 9

Pressing machineries – buck pressing, iron pressing, block or die pressing, form pressing,
steamers; folding and packing machines; safety measures
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students would understand
CO1 - Fundamental principle and working of spreading and cutting machines
CO 2 - Stitch formation and other mechanisms of SNLS machine and chain stitch machine
CO 3 - Principle of button fixing and button holing machines and types of needles and geometry
CO 4 - Stitch formation and other mechanisms of overlock, flatlock and other special sewing
machines
CO 5 - Different types of finishing machines used for garments
TEXTBOOKS
1. Harold Carr., and Barbara latham., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, 4th Edition,
Whiley-Black well Sciences, 2008, ISBN: 1405161981 / ISBN: 978-1405161985
2. Jacob Solinger., “Apparel Manufacturing Handbook”, 2nd Edition Bobbin Blenheim Media
Corp, 1988, ISBN : 1879570009 / ISBN: 978-1879570009
REFERENCES
1. Ruth E. Glock., and Grace I. Kunz., “Apparel Manufacturing Sewn Product Analysis”, 4th
Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005, ISBN: 0131119826 | ISBN-13: 9780131119826
2. Villumsone-Nemes I., “Industrial Cutting of Textiles material”, Wood head Publications Pvt.
Ltd 2012, ISBN: 978-1-85709-134-5

147
3. JelkaGersak., “Design of Clothing Manufacture Process - A Systematic Approach to
Planning Scheduling and Control”, Wood head Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2013, ISBN: 978-1-
85709-778-1

148
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Fundamental principle 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
and working of
machines used for
spreading and cutting
CO2 Stitch formation and 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
other mechanisms of
SNLS machine and
chain stitch machine
CO3 Principle of button 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
fixing and button
holing machines
CO4 Stitch formation and 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
other mechanisms of
overlock, flatlock and
other special sewing
machines
CO5 Different types of 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
finishing machines
used for garments
Overall CO 2.57 2.28 1.14 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

149
FT3692 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING IN GARMENT MANUFACTURING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering
 To provide knowledge on different tools of industrial engineering and its application in
apparel industry

UNIT I 9
Industrial Engineering - evolution, functions, role of industrial engineer; productivity concepts,
causes for low productivity in apparel industry, suggestions for productivity improvement; basic
work content, added work content, reduction of work content and ineffective time, work study-
introduction and procedure.

UNIT II 13
Methods study - introduction, techniques of recording; method analysis techniques; principles of
motion economy; method study in garment manufacture; ergonomics - importance, workplace
design, fatigue

UNIT III 13
Work measurement – introduction; time study – equipment and procedure; standard data;
predetermined time standards; work sampling techniques; incentive wage system; work
measurement applied to garment industry- calculation of SAM

UNIT IV 5
Site selection for textile industry; plant layout - types of layouts suitable for textile industry,
methods to construct layout; line balancing

UNIT V 5
Statistical Process Control – data collection; concept of AQL, control charts in quality control;
process capability
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1: Understand the basics of industrial engineering and productivity concepts
CO2: Method study and its techniques
CO3: Applywork measurement
CO4: Understand the concepts of layout and line balancing
CO5: Interpret the result using statistical process control

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanna O. P. and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”,
DhanpatRaiPublications, New Delhi, 2005
2. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study", ILO, Geneva, 1989
3. Norberd Lloyd Enrick, “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern
(P)Ltd., New Delhi, 1988
4. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989

REFERENCES:
1. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Black well Science, U.
S.A., 1995
2. Richard I. Levin. and David S. Rubin., “Statistics for Management”, 7th Edition,
PrenticeHall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1997

150
3. David M. Levine, Timothy C. Krehbiel and Mark L. Berenson., “Business Statistics: A
FirstCourse”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2000
4. Panneerselvam R., “Production and Operation Management”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002
5. Edward S. Buffa and RakeshSarin., “Modern Production and Operations
Management”,John Wiley & Sons, U. S. A., 1987
6. Lee J. Krajewski and Larry P. Ritzman., “Operations Management: Strategy and
Analysis”,Addison Wesley, 2000
7. Chase, Aquilano and Jacobs., “Production and Operations Management”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 1999

151
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
Understand the
CO1 basics of 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 - - 3 2 2
industrial
engineering
Gain knowledge
CO2 on method study 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - 3 2 3
and its techniques
Acquire knowledge
CO3 on work 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - 3 2 3
measurement
Understand the
CO4 concepts of layout 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - 3 2 3
and line balancing
Interpret the result
CO5 using statistical 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 - - 3 2 3
process control
Overall CO 2.2 2.4 2.8 2.8 2.8 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.6 1 - - 3 2 2.8

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

152
FT3404 PATTERN ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enhance the fundamental knowledge in human anthropometrics from the scientific and
technological viewpoint
 To equip students with comprehensive pattern making skills

UNIT I STUDY OF BODY MEASUREMENTS AND SIZING SYSTEMS 6

Anthropometry- Human Anatomy, Body Ideals-Eight head theory: body proportions, height and
weight distribution. Important body measurements for children, men and women across all age
groups - Clothing sizing systems - Methods of measuring body dimensions, Standard
measurement chart-designation and control dimensions. Landmark terms.

UNIT II BASICS OF PATTERN MAKING 15

Introduction to pattern making and methods. Functions of pattern making tools, Preparing and
Measuring the Form, Pattern making terminologies, Development of pattern - Drafting and draping
methods - Basic men’s block - bodice, sleeves trousers, and women’s block - bodice, sleeves,
trousers, skirt.

UNIT III PATTERN ALTERATIONS AND GRADING 6

Pattern alteration for fit, Factors affecting the pattern making process. Grading process,
grade rules, and types of grading system.

UNIT IV TECHNIQUES OF PATTERN MAKING 9

Dart manipulation- single dart series-slash-spread technique, pivotal transfer technique. Two dart
series- slash spread and pivotal transfer technique. Graduated and radiating darts. Parallel,
asymmetric and intersecting darts. Types of added fullness and Contouring Principle.

UNIT V PATTERNS FOR COLLARS AND SLEEVES 9

Collar classification and terms, basic shirt collar, Peter Pan collar, sailor collar, mandarin collar,
built-up neck lines, Cowls, Sleeve cap, sleeve cuffs, puff, petal, lantern and leg-of-mutton sleeves.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1: Understand Anthropometry related concepts and important body measurements
CO2: Prepare patterns for basic blocks using drafting and draping techniques
CO3: Develop knowledge on the techniques involved in grading and in pattern alteration
CO4: Apply dart manipulation techniques to design, variation in garment components
CO5: Prepare patterns for basic collar and sleeve components

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harrold Carr., and Barbara Latham., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell
Science, U.K., 1994,ISBN: 0632037482 | ISBN-13: 9780632037483.
2. Gerry Cooklin., Steven George Hayes., and John McLoughlin., “Introduction to Clothing
Manufacture”, Wiley-Blackwell Science, U.K., 2006, ISBN: 0632058463 | ISBN-
13:9780632058464.
3. Helen Joseph Armstrong, “Pattern Making for Fashion Design” Pearson Education
(Singapore)Pvt. Ltd.,2005 2. Winifred Aldrich, “Metric Pattern Cutting” Blackwell Science
Ltd., 1994

153
EFERENCES:
1. Gerry Cooklin, “Master Patterns and Grading for Women’s Outsizes”, Blackwell Scientific
Publications, 1995.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Master Patterns and Grading for Men’s Outsize”, Blackwell Scientific
Publications, 1992.
3. Jeenne Price and Bernard Zamkoff, “Grading Techniques for Modern Design” Fairchild
Publications, 1990.
4. Amaden-Crawford Connie, “The Art of Fashion Draping (3rd edition)” Om Books
International Publications, 2005
5. Winifred Aldrich, “Metric Pattern Cutting” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1994

154
Course Articulation Matrix:

Cours Program Outcome

e
Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PSO PSO
PO2 PO11 PO12 PSO3
es 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
Understand
Anthropometry
related concepts
CO1 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2
and important
body
measurements
Prepare patterns
for basic blocks
CO2 using drafting and 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2
draping
techniques
Develop
knowledge on the
techniques
CO3 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2
involved in
grading and in
pattern alteration
Apply dart
manipulation
techniques to
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2
design, variation
in garment
components
Prepare patterns
for basic collar
CO5 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2
and sleeve
components

Overall CO 2 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 - 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

155
FT3691 APPAREL MARKETING AND MERCHANDISING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To acquaint the students with the concepts of Fashion business, design merchandising,
sourcing and export documentation

UNIT I FASHION INDUSTRY OVERVIEW 9

Segments of the fashion industry – history and categories, - influence of the customer; different
generations and motivations behind the changes. Apparel business practices; business operations
of domestic and export oriented of Indian apparel industries, consumer buying behavior, Market
segmentation, market positioning.

UNIT II MARKETING FOR APPAREL AND TEXTILE PRODUCTS 9

Uniqueness of apparel market, core concepts and orientation towards market place, strategies and
planning, market research and forecast, customers, consumer markets and business markets,
market segments and brand building, brand positioning and competition, programmatic marketing;
digital and autonomous interventions, conversational interfaces - Artificial intelligence chat bots

UNIT III DESIGN MERCHANDISING 9

Concepts of merchandising, apparel product lines, dimensions of product change, determination
and development of product line and product range; creative design of garments and accessories,
new product development and seasons of sale, costing, coordination and communication with the
production house and export house

UNIT IV SOURCING 9
Understanding the basics of sourcing, sourcing strategy and best sourcing practice in apparel and
textile businesses, supply chain and demand chain, sourcing negotiations, global co-ordination in
sourcing, materials management and quality in sourcing, quick response, ERP, supplier
partnership in sourcing, JIT technology, made to fit.

UNIT V EXPORT DOCUMENTATION AND POLICIES 9

Government policies, guide lines for apparel export and domestic trade, tax structures and
government incentives in apparel trade; export documents and its purposes, banking activities,
Letter of credit, logistics and shipping, foreign exchange regulation, export risk management and
insurance; export finance, Special economic zones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1: Understanding the international apparel business and role of Asian countries in the apparel
and fashion trade
CO2: Applying the concepts of marketing in the apparel industry
CO3: Understand the concepts of merchandising and new product development
CO4: Understand the apparel product dynamics in a market and relating it along the value chain.
CO5: Acquire knowledge in Export documentation and policies

156
 Course Program
Outcome Outcome
s PS PS
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO PO PS
11 12 O O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 O3
1 2
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
Overall
3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Elian stone, Jean A samples, “Fashion Merchandising”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
York, 1985, ISBN: 0-07-061742-2
2. Gibson G. Vedamani, “Retail Management Functional Principles and
Practices”,JaicoPublishingHouse,SecondEdition,2002
3. Ruth E. Glock, Grace I. Kunz “Apparel Manufacturing Sewn Product Analysis” Fourth
Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ, 2005, ISBN: 81-7758-076-0

REFERENCES:
1. Shivaramu S.,” Export Marketing” – A Practical Guide to Exporters”, Wheeler Publishing,
Ohio, 1996, ISBN: 81-7544-166-6
2. Warren. J. Keegan and Mark.C.Green , “Global Marketing”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New
Delhi, 2005.
3. Philip Kotler, Kevin Lane Keller, Abraham Koshy, and Mithileshwar Jha , “Marketing
Management A South Asian Perspective”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006
4. NairSuja.R,"RetailManagement",HimalayaPublishingHouse,2008.
5. John Donnellan “Merchandise Buying and Management”, Farichild
Publications,inc.,NewYork,2002

157
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Understanding the - 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 - 2 2 2
international apparel
business and role of
Asian countries in the
apparel and fashion
trade
CO2 Applying the concepts - 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 - 2 2 2
of marketing in the
apparel industry
CO3 Understand the - 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 - 2 2 2
concepts of
merchandising and
new product
development
CO4 Understand the - 1 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 2
apparel product
dynamics in a market
and relating it along
the value chain.
CO5 Acquire knowledge in - 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 - 2 2 2
Export documentation
and policies
Overall CO - 1 2.6 2 2 1 1 2.4 2 1.2 1 - 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively
158
CTT362 APPAREL PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LAB LTPC
0063
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to, construct different garment components.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Sewing practice of stitch classes.
2. Sewing practice of seam types
3. Sewing of different types of plackets
4. Sewing of different types of pockets
5. Sewing of different types of sleeves
6. Sewing of different types of collars and cuff
7. Sewing of different types of neckline finishes.
8. Sewing of different types of pleats, tucks and gathers
9. Construct a men’s shirt
10. Construct a men’s trousers
11. Construct a women’s skirt
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Make different seams and stitches
CO2: Make different cut component and parts of basic garment
CO3: Carryout sewing of cut component assembly in to basic garment

159
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Make different 1 - 1 - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
seams and stitches
CO2 Make different cut 1 - 1 - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
component and parts
of basic garment
CO3 Carryout sewing of 2 - 2 - - - - 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1
cut component
assembly in to basic
garment
Overall CO 1.33 - - - - - 1 1.33 1.33 1.33 1 3 2 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

160
CTT361 BASIC SEWING AND PATTERN MAKING LABORATORY LTPC
0063
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to get practical experience in understanding sewing machine components
and to practically carryout pattern making

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Identification of single needle lockstitch machine (SNLS) components and understanding their
functions.
2. Needle fixing and threading in single needle, double needle, over-lock, flat lock and feed-of
the-arm machine.
3. Practice for pedal and knee lifter operations and winding the bobbin thread.
4. Sewing exercise on paper in SNLS - Exercise 1 - Parallel line - Exercise 2 - Square -
Exercise 3 - Curves - Exercise 4 - Concentric curves
5. Stitching exercise on fabric panels in SNLS - Exercise 1 - Parallel line - Exercise 2 - Square -
Exercise 3 - Curves - Exercise 4 - Concentric curves
6. Prepare samples in SNLS machine by varying the stitch length and thread tension.
7. Measuring the Dress Form – Male, female and child and formulating the measurement charts
8. Drafting the basic blocks of male
9. Drafting the basic blocks of female
10. Grading of basic block.
11. Drafting of men’s shirt
12. Drafting of men’s trousers.
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this practical course, the student shall be able to
CO1. Identify the machine components and understand the basic settings in single needle
machine
CO2. Identify the machine components and understand the basic settings in flatlock and feed off
arm machine
CO3. Sew on line markings in paper using single needle lockstitch machine
CO4. Sew on fabric panels in single needle lockstitch machine
CO5. Draft the basic block and grade the same

161
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Identify the machine - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
components and
understand the basic
settings in single
needle machine
CO2 Identify the machine - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
components and
understand the basic
settings in flatlock
and feed off arm
machine
CO3 Sew on line - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
markings in paper
using single needle
lockstitch machine
CO4 Sew on fabric panels - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
in single needle
lockstitch machine
CO5 Draft the basic block - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1
and grade the same
Overall CO - - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

162
 Management of Textile Industries

CTT341 OPERATIONS RESEARCH IN TEXTILE INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about
 Various operations research (OR) methods that can be applied in the textile industry
 Expressing of problems arising in the textile industry in appropriate Operations Research
formats
 Methods of solving such Operations Research problems

UNIT I 9
Introduction – History of Operations Research, Scope of Operation Research, applications and
limitations; Linear programming problem – construction, solution by graphical method, the Simplex
method and its extension by the Big M method; integer programming – introduction; application of
the LP technique in the field of Textile technology

UNIT II 9
Transportation problem – construction, initial basic feasible solution – North West Corner rule,
lowest cost entry method, Vogel’s Approximation Method; the optimality test – Modified
Distribution method, stepping stone method; transshipment problems.

UNIT III 9
The Assignment problem – construction, solution by Hungarian method, application in the textile
industry; sequencing problems from textile industry; Decisions theory - decisions under assumed
certainty, decision under risk, decision under uncertainty, illustrations from textile industry

UNIT IV 9
Replacement analysis; inventory control – ABC, VED analysis, EOQ – application in textile
industry, simulation-introduction, Monte Carlo method

UNIT V 9
Project planning and control models: CPM, PERT – network representation, determining critical
path, project duration; crashing of project duration; resource leveling
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Design Operations Research problems from the cases arising in the Textile Industry and
determine solution for linear programming problems
CO2: Construct and solve transportation problems
CO3: Construct and solve assignment problems and understand decision making under different
conditions.
CO4: Carryout replacement analysis and inventory control
CO5: Construct and solve project scheduling by PERT and CPM techniques and resource leveling

TEXTBOOKS
1. Ronald L. and Rardin., “Optimization in Operations Research”, Pearson Education,
1998,ISBN: 0023984155 | ISBN-13: 9780023984150
2. Srivastava U.K., Shenoy G.V., and Sharma S. C., “Quantitative Techniques for
ManagerialDecisions”, Second Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2007, ISBN:
0470273755 | ISBN- 13: 9780470273753
3. Panneerselvam R., “Operations Research”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd; 2nd
Edition, 2004,ISBN : 8120319230 / ISBN: 978-8120329287
163
REFERENCES
1. Frederick S. Hillier., Gerald J. Lieberman., Frederick Hillier., and Gerald
Lieberman.,“Introduction to Operations Research”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
8th Edition, 2004, ISBN: 0073017795 / ISBN: 978-0073017792
2. Hamdy A Taha., “Operations Research – An Introduction”, Prentice Hall, 9thEdition,
2010 ISBN: 013255593X | ISBN-13: 9780132555937.
3. Fabrycky W. J.,Ghare P. M., and Torgersen P. E., “Applied Operation Research
andManagement Science”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1984, ISBN: 013041459X /
ISBN: 9780130414595.
4. Tulsian P.C., “Quantitative Techniques Theory and Problems”, Dorling Kindersley
(India) Pvt.Ltd., 2006, ISBN: 8131701867 | ISBN-13: 9788131701867

164
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Design Operations Research problems
from the cases arising in the Textile
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
Industry and determine solution for
linear programming problems
Construct and solve transportation
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
problems

Construct and solve assignment

CO3 problems and understand decision 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
making under different conditions.
Carryout replacement analysis and
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
inventory control
Construct and solve project scheduling
CO5 by PERT and CPM techniques and 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2
resource leveling
Overall CO 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 1 2 1 3 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

165
CTT347 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an insight on the fundamentals of supply chain networks, tools and
techniques.
 To train the students to new and recent developments in supply chains, e-
business and information technology

UNIT I 9
Basic principles of supply chain management and logistics, supply chain models, supply
chain for volatile market; supply chain drivers and metrics in apparel industries; roll of supply
chain in the textile and apparel industries’ financial stability.

UNIT II 9
Planning supply and demand in apparel production house, managing economies of scale,
supply cycle and inventory levels; managing uncertainty in supply chain, safety pricing and
inventory; make vs buy decision, make vs hire decision; geographical identification of
suppliers, supplier evaluation, supplier selection, contract negotiations and finalization.

UNIT III 9
Distribution network and design for global textile and apparel products, models of distribution
– facility location and allocation of capacity, uncertainty on design and network optimization;
the role of transportation in supply chain, modes of transportation, characteristics of
transportation, transport design options for global textile and apparel network, trade-off in
transport design, risk management in transportation, transport decision in practice for textile
and apparel industries.

UNIT IV 9
Coordination in supply chain- the bullwhip effect, forecasting, obstacles to coordination in
supply chain; supply chain management for apparel retail stores, high fashion fad; supply
chain in e-business and b2b practices

UNIT V 9
Import - export management, documentation, insurance, packing and foreign exchange;
methods of payments – domestic, international, commercial terms; dispute handling modes
and channels; supply chain and Information system; customer relationship management
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student shall have the
CO1 Knowledge on the basic frame work of supply chain management
CO2 Understanding the economics of supply and demand cycle
CO3 Knowledge on its functions in the industry
CO4 Understanding on coordination of supply chain management
CO5 Understanding supply chain management with apparel export and import

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David Simchi-Levi., Philip Kaminsky., and Edith Simchi-Levi., “Designing and Managing
the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Cases”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2012, ISBN: 0073341525 / ISBN: 978-0073341521
2. Altekar Rahul V., “Supply Chain Management-Concept and Cases”, PHI, 2005, ASIN:
B00K7YGX2S

166
REFERENCES:
1. Janat Shah., “Supply Chain Management – Text and Cases”, Pearson Education,
2009, ISBN: 8131715175 | ISBN-13: 9788131715178
2. Peter Meindl., Kalra D. V., Kalra D., and Sunil Chopra “Supply Chain Management-
Strategy Planning and Operation”, Pearson Education, 2010, ISBN: 8131730719 |
ISBN-13: 9788131730713

167
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 Knowledge of the 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
framework and
CO2 Knowledge on 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
scope of supply
chain networks and
CO3 Knowledge on its 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
functions in the
industry
CO4 Capacity to develop 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
clear, concise and
organized approach
to operations
management
CO5 Basic knowledge on 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
the shipment
procedure
Overall CO 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

168
CTT336 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC
0063
OBJECTIVE
To enable the students understand about the Enterprise Resource Planning software and its
modules

List of experiments
Practice on data entry, report generation in Enterprise Resource Planning software
1. Costing, order booking, MRP, purchase, production planning, production orders, inventory
control, packing, shipping, scheduling, sample preparation and approval, business reports
2. ERP in apparel production – time study, cutting, production tracking, cut panel process,
garment quality control, order completion, machine repairs and maintenance, reports
3. ERP in retail management – style template, finished goods barcoding, stock taking, stock
inward, retail order booking, stock allocation, scan and pack, dispatch, invoice, point of
sale, reports
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
Upon the completion of this course the students shall be able to
CO1: Understand the structure of ERP software
CO2: Data entry in ERP software
CO3: Creating records and managing information at different section of apparel industry for
decision making

169
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program Outcome
Outcomes PO1 PO PO3 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO3
2 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Understand the - - 2 - 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 -
structure of ERP
software
CO2 Data entry in ERP - - 2 - 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 -
software
CO3 Creating records - - 2 - 3 - - 2 2 1 3 1 - 2 -
and managing
information at
different section of
apparel industry
for decision
making
Overall CO - - 2.25 - 3 - - 2 2 1 2.5 1 - 2 -

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

170
CTT354 APPAREL COSTING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn apparel costing, budgeting and working capital management

UNIT I 9
Cost accounting, elements of cost, classification of cost elements – examples from apparel
industry; standard costing, analysis of variance; breakeven analysis, cost volume profit analysis

UNIT II 18
Costing of fabrics; costing of apparel – woven, knits of various styles, accounting of prime costs
and overhead costs, allocation of overheads, cost control; cost sheet preparation

UNIT III 9
Working capital management in garment unit – determination, sources, cost; Budget, types of
budgets, budgeting and control in apparel industry

UNIT IV 9
Detailed project report – elements, preparation for a garment unit
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will able to
CO1.explain the cost accounting and cost elements
CO2.estimate cost elements involved in fabric and apparel costing
CO3.demonstrate the working capital management
CO4.develop detailed project report preparation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pandey I. M., “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 8th
Edition, 1999.
2. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management, Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2001

REFERENCES:
1. Aswat Damodaran, “Corporate Finance Theory and Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000
2. James C., Van Home., “Financial Management and Policy”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1980.
3. Thukaram Rao M.E., “Cost and Management Accounting” New Age International, Bangalore,
2004
4. Khan and Jain, “Basic financial Management & Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th
edition, 2001

171
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 explain the cost 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1
accounting and cost
elements
CO2 estimate cost 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1
elements involved in
fabric and apparel
costing
CO3 demonstrate the 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1
working capital
management
CO4 develop detailed 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1
project report
preparation
Overall CO 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

172
 CTT355 MANAGEMENT OF TEXTILE EFFLUENTS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to understand the concepts of effluent treatment methods for textile
industry and their management

UNIT I CHARACTERISATION OF EFFLUENTS 9

Characteristics of textile effluents – colour, pH, hardness TSS, TDS, COD, BOD, alkalinity,
estimation of metal ions.

UNIT II PRELIMINARY TREATMENT 9

Effluent treatment flow chart; preliminary treatment – screening, shredding, grit removal. primary
treatment – equalization, coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation.

UNIT III SECONDARY TREATMENT AND TERTIARY TREATMENT 9

Secondary treatment – activated sludge process; tertiary treatment - adsorption, membrane
technology, radiation (uv, gamma, electron beam), electrochemical, chemical (h2o2, chlorine,
Fenton’s reagent), thermal, corona discharge. Marine discharge of effluent.

UNIT IV RECYCLE AND REUSE 9

Recycling and reuse of waste water; reject management-importance, brine reject source; thermal
evaporation – mechanical vacuum recompression evaporator, multiple effect evaporators;
crystallizer; sludge management.

UNIT V EFFLUENT TREATMENT IN TEXTILE INDUSTRY 9

Generation of textile effluents; characteristics and norms of textile effluents; zero liquid discharge
(zld) in chemical processing industry, zero discharge of hazardous chemicals (zdhc); effluent
treatment plants in processing units.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the student shall be able to explain
CO1: Characterization of effluents
CO2: Different methods primary treatment of effluent
CO3: Secondary and tertiary treatment of effluent
CO4: Importance of recycling and reuse
CO5: treatment of effluents from textile industry

TEXTBOOKS
1. Manivasakam N, “Treatment of Textile Processing Effluents”, Chemical Publishing Company,
U.S.A, 2013, ISBN 978-0-82060-175-5
2. Christie R M, “Environmental aspects in Textile Dyeing”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd., UK,
2007, ISBN 978-1-84569-115-8

REFERENCES
1. Karmakar S R, “Chemical Technology in the Pre-treatment Processes of Textiles”,
Elsevier, New York, 1999, ISBN 978-1-8044450-060-1
2. Cavaco-Paulo and Gübitz G M, “Textile Processing with Enzymes”, Woodhead Publishing
Ltd., UK, 2003,ISBN 978-1-85573-610-8
3. Peter J Hauser, “Advances in Treating Textile Effluent”, InTech Publisher, Croatia, 2011,
ISBN 978-9-53307-704-8
4. Babu B V, “Effluent Treatment: Basics & A Case Study”, Chemical Engineering Department,
Birla Institute of Technology and Science (BITS), PILANI, Rajasthan, India, 2000.

173
 Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcome PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
s PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Characterization of 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2
CO1
effluents
Different methods 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2
CO2 primary treatment of
effluent
Secondary and tertiary 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2
CO3
treatment of effluent
Importance of recycling 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2
CO4
and reuse
CO5 Treatment of effluents 2 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 - 2 2 2 2 2 2
from textile industry
Overall CO 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

174
CTT356 TEXTILE AND APPAREL EXIM MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To give the students an exposure on international market for textile products, regulations with
respect to export and import of textiles

UNIT I 9
International markets for yarns, woven fabrics; international market for cotton, silk, jute, wool and
other fibres; export and import of textiles by India – current status, promotional activities

UNIT II 9
International markets for carpets and home textiles – product types, market potential and statistics,
India - current status and promotional activities, role of export promotional councils

UNIT III 9
International markets for woven piece goods, knitted garments, leather garments; statistics of
international apparel market and trade; export incentives, role of AEPC, CII, FIEO, Textile
Committee

UNIT IV 9
Marketing – strategies, global brand building; logistics & SCM; role of export finances & EXIM
banking, ECGC, Indian council of arbitration, FEMA; impact of foreign trade on Indian economy

UNIT V 9
Exim policy - customs act, acts relating to export/import of textile and apparel; Indian customs
formalities - export documentation for excisable goods, import documentation, clearance of import
goods; concepts - 100% export oriented units, export processing zones, special economic zones;
duty drawback procedure; import/export incentives; licenses; case study
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the international market for fibre, yarn and woven fabric
CO2: Discuss the international market for carpets and home textiles
CO3: Explain the international market for woven, knitted and leather garments
CO4: Describe the marketing strategies and export finance
CO5: Discuss the Indian EXIM policies and procedure

TEXTBOOKS
1. Kapoor D.C., “Export Management”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2009, ISBN:
8125909397 / ISBN: 978-8125909392
2. Govindan N.S., “Indirect Taxes Made Easy”, C. Sitaraman& Co., 2014, ASIN:
B00HYVS32K

REFERENCES
1. Charles W.I. Hill., and Arun Kumar Jain., “International Business”, 10th Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2014, ISBN: 007811277X / ISBN: 978-0078112775.
2. John D. Daniels., and Lee H. Radebaugh., “International Business”, 15th Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, New Delhi, 2014, ISBN: 0133457230 / ISBN: 978-0133457230.
3. Aswathappa K., “International Business”, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015, ISBN:
933922258X / ISBN: 978-9339222581.
4. Michael R. Czinkota., Ilkka A. Ronkainen., and Michael H.,Moffet, “International
Business”,8th Edition, Wiley, 2010, ISBN: 0470530650 / ISBN: 978-0470530658
5. Aravind V. Phatak., Rabi S. Bhagat., and Roger J. Kashlak., “International Management”, 2
nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008, ISBN: 0073210579 / ISBN : 978-0073210575
175
6. OdedShenkar., and YaongLuo., “International Business”,3rd Edition, Routledge, 2014,
ISBN : 0415817137 / ISBN : 978-0415817134
7. Datey V.S., “Indirect Taxes”, 34th Edition, Taxmann Publications, 2015, ISBN: 9350715570
/ISBN: 9789350715574

176
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1
1 2 3 4 5 6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 2 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
Explain the international
CO1 market for fibre, yarn and 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
woven fabric
Discuss the international
CO2 market for carpets and 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
home textiles
Explain the international
CO3 market for woven, knitted 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
and leather garments
Describe the marketing
CO4 strategies and export 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
finance
Discuss the Indian EXIM
CO5 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -
policies and procedure
Overall CO 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 1 2 1 -

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

177
 Technical Textiles

CTT348 TECHNICAL TEXTILES LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students, understand the characteristics of textile materials and their
selection for different applications viz., transport, sports, medical, protective and geo
applications.

UNIT I AUTOMOTIVE AND INDUSTRIALTEXTILES 9

Introduction-Classification and major applications of technical textiles and market potential;
Design and characteristics required in textiles for automotive applications - tyres, airbags,
seat belts and interiors;Textiles used for conveyor belts, power transfer belts in industry;
Applications of textile reinforced composites in automatives.

UNIT II HYGIENE TEXTILE 9

Design and characteristics required in textiles for hygiene applications- surgical gowns and
other coveralls, masks and respirators, gloves, hospital bedspreads, wipes – application of
antimicrobial treatment; application of nanotechnology.

UNIT III PROTECTIVE AND SPORTS TEXTILE 9

Material requirements and garment design in protection from hazards due to mechanical,
extreme climate, nuclear, biological, chemical and flame; textiles in sportswear.

UNIT IV GEO TEXTILES 9

Use of geo textiles - infiltration, drainage, separation and reinforcement application in
construction; type of fibre and fabric to be used in such applications; evaluation of geo
textiles; use of textile materials in permanent and temporary civil construction - tents,
awnings, sound and thermal insulation.

UNIT V FILTRATION AND OTHERS 9

Filtration-mechanism of filtration, dust collection, solid-liquid separation, liquid – liquid
filtration, liquid-gas separation, Fabric construction and general consideration for filtration;
Quality requirement of materials used in fishing industry like nets, ropes; sound and thermal
insulation; textile abrasives
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Discuss the application of textiles and composites in automotive and industrial textiles
CO2: Explain the uses of textiles in hygiene applications
CO3: Selection of textile material and design of protective clothing and sports wear
CO4: Identify the textile materials and property requirements for geo textiles application
CO5: Review the functional requirements and properties of textile for filtration application.

TEXTBOOKS
1. AnandS.C.,“MedicalTextiles”,TextileInstitute,Manchester,2001,ISBN:185573494X.Muk
hopadhyayS.K.andPartridgeJ.F.,“AutomotiveTextiles”,TextileProgress,Vol.29,No1/2,
1999, ISBN: 1870372212.
2. Horrocks A.R. and Anand S.C., “Handbook of Technical Textiles”, The Textile Institute,
Manchester, 2000, ISBN: 1855733854.

178
REFERENCES

1. 1.Adanur S., “Wellington Sears Handbook of Industrial Textiles”,

TechnomicPublishingCo. Inc., 1995, ISBN:1–56676–340–1.
2. Scott.R.A., “Textiles for Protection”, Wood head Publishing Limited, Cambridge,
UK,2005, ISBN1-85573-921-6.
3. Saville.B.P, “Physical Testing of Textiles”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge,
UK, 1999, ISBN1-85573-367-6.
4. Long.A.C, “Design and Manufacture of Textile Composities”, Wood head Publishing
Ltd, Cambridge, UK, 2005, ISBN1-85573-744-2.
5. Fung.W,“CoatedandLaminatedTextiles”,WoodheadPublishingLtd.,Cambridge,UK,2002,
ISBN1-85573-576-8.
6. Anand.S.C, Kennedy.J.F, Miraftab.M and Rajendran.S., “Medical Textiles
andBiomaterials for Health Care”, Wood head Publishing Ltd, Cambridge, UK, 2006,
ISBN1- 85573-683-7.
7. Fung.W and Hardcastle, “Textiles in Automotive Engineering”, Wood head
PublishingLtd., Cambridge, UK, 2001, ISBN1-85573-493-1.
8. John.N.W.M,“GeoTextile”,BlackieandSonsLtd.,London,UK.,1987,ISBN0-412-1351-
9. SarsbyR.W., “Geosynthetics in civil engineering”, Wood head
Publishing, Cambridge, U.K., 2006, ISBN:9781855736078.

179
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Discuss the application of textiles and
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
composites in automotive textiles
Explain the uses of textiles in medical
CO2 and hygiene applications 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
Selection of textile material and design
CO3 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
of protective clothing and sports wear
Identify the textile materials and
CO4 property requirements for geo textiles 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
application
Review the functional requirements
CO5 and properties of textile for filtration 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
and industrial application
Overall CO 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

180
CTT340 MEDICAL TEXTILES LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students, understand the different types of biomaterials and biomedical
application of different textile structures

UNIT I MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING METHOD 13

Metals, ceramics, polymers used for bio medical applications – manufacture, features and
limitations; super absorbent polymers, cell- biomaterial interaction

UNIT II NON-IMPLANTABLE TEXTILES 9

Non-implantable materials: wound dressing- requirements of wound dressing, types, properties
and applications; bandages - types, evaluation and applications application of nanotechnology

UNIT III IMPLANTABLE TEXTILES 9

Implantable biomedical devices: vascular grafts, sutures - types, properties and applications;
extra-corporeal devices; scaffolds for tissue engineering: development and characterization
application of nanotechnology

UNIT IV HEALTHCARE TEXTILE 9

Healthcare and hygiene products: surgical gowns, masks, respirators, wipes, napkins,
antibacterial, anti odour textiles application of nanotechnology
UNIT V QUALITY EVALUTION 5
Standards; safety, legal and ethical issues involved in conducting trials with medical textile
materials; disposal of medical textile products
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain different types of materials used for biomedical applications
CO2: Elaborate functional requirements, types and evaluation of wound dressings and bandages
CO3: Discuss the functional requirements and characterization of vascular grafts, sutures and
scaffolds for tissue engineering applications
CO4: Explain the textile material used for hygiene and health care applications
CO5: Describe the Standards for testing, safety and ethical issues related to medical textiles
TEXTBOOKS
1. Allison Mathews., and Martin Hardingham., “Medical and Hygiene Textile Production - A
Hand Book”, Intermediate Technology Publications, 1994, ISBN: 1853392111 | ISBN-13:
9781853392115
2. Anand S.C., Kennedy J.F.,Miraftab M., and Rajendran S., “Medical Textiles and Biomaterials
for Health Care”, Wood head Publishing Ltd., 2006, ISBN: 0849317800 | ISBN-13:
9780849317804
REFERENCES
1. Joon B. Park., and Joseph D. Bronzino., “Biomaterials – Principles and Applications”, CRC
Press, Boca Raton London, New York, Washington, D.C. 2002, ISBN: 0849314917 | ISBN-
13: 9780849314919
2. Anand S., “Medical Textiles”, Textile Institute, 1996, ISBN: 185573317X
3. Horrocks A.R., and Anand S.C., “Technical Textiles”, Textile Institute,
1999,ISBN:185573317X
4. 4. Adanur S., “Wellington Sears Handbook of Industrial
Textiles”,Technomic Publishing Co. Inc.,LancasterPennylvania, 1995, ISBN 1-56676-340-1
5. Michael Szycher., and Steven James Lee., “Modern Wound Dressing: A Systematic
Approachto Wound Healing”, Journal of Biomaterials Applications.
181
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain different types of materials used
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
for biomedical applications
Elaborate functional requirements,
CO2 types and evaluation of wound 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
dressings and bandages
Discuss the functional requirements and
characterization of vascular grafts,
CO3 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
sutures and scaffolds for
tissue engineering applications
Explain the textile material used for
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
hygiene and health care applications
Describe the Standards for testing,
CO5 safety and ethical issues related to 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
medical textiles
Overall CO 3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

182
. CTT339 HOME TEXTILES LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable the students to learn about
 Various kinds of materials used as home textiles
 Recent developments in home furnishing, floor covering and other home textile products
 Finishes and Evaluation required for home textiles.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5
Concepts of Home textiles and its market scenario, consumer expectation from home textiles; fibers
and fabrics used - Woven, nonwoven and knits; manufacturing concepts- damask, brocade, organdie,
chiffon, oxford, tapestry

UNIT II HOME FURNISHING 13

Living room furnishings – types, fabric selection and design concepts; bed room furnishings- types,
fabric selection and design concepts; advances in the production of different types of bed linen, bed
sheets, blankets, blanket covers, comforts, comfort covers, bed spreads, mattress and mattress
covers, pads, pillows; kitchen furnishing - fabric selection and finishing for dish cloth, hand towels,
aprons, mittens and runners

UNIT III FLOOR COVERING AND DRAPES 13

Recent developments in manufacturing of floor coverings - hard floor coverings, resilient floor
coverings; soft floor coverings – carpets and rugs, laying procedure, maintenance and care; cushion
and pads; factors affecting the selection of floor covering; advances in home decoration -draperies –
choice of fabrics ,curtains, finishing of draperies- tucks and pleats; types of drapery rods, hooks, tape
rings and pins.

UNIT IV FINISHES USED IN HOME TEXTILES 9

Introduction, thermal draperies, protection against unpleasant odour, antimicrobial finish, moisture
management finish, flame retardant finish, towel finishing;sensory perception technology; insect and
mite repellent finish, antistatic finish; temperature regulated beddings

UNIT V EVALUATION OF HOME TEXTILES 5

Test methods - towels, rugs; flammability standards for curtains, test methods for pot holders and
woven mittens; labelling and care instructions of home textiles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student shall be able to understand
CO 1 - Different types of materials used as home textiles
CO 2 - Selection of fabric and design for living room, bed room and kitchen furnishings
CO 3 - Selection of floor coverings and draperies
CO 4 - Finishes used for various home textile products
CO 5 - Evaluation of home textile products

TEXTBOOKS:
1. AlexanderN.G., “Designing Interior Environment”, Mas Court Brace Covanorich,
Newyork, 1972 67
2. DonserkeryK.G., “Interior Decoration in India”, D.B.Taraporeval Sons and Co. Pvt. Ltd.,
1979, ISBN: 0906216338 | ISBN-13: 9780906216330

REFERENCES:
1. Wingate J. F., and Mohler I. B., “Textile Fabrics& Their Selection”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
New York, 1984,ISBN: 0139128654 | ISBN-13: 9780139128653
183
2. Subtra Das, “Performance of home textiles”, Woodhead Publishing India Pvt.Ltd., 2010,
ISBN: 0857090070 | ISBN-13: 9780857090072
3. Rowe T., “Interior Textiles Design and Developments”, Woodhead Publishing India
Pvt.Ltd., 2009, ISBN: 1845693515 | ISBN-13: 9781845693510
4. Schindler W. D., and Hauser P. J., “Chemical finishing of textiles”, Woodhead
Publishing, England, 2004, ISBN: 1855739054 | ISBN-13: 9781855739055

184
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 Different types of 1 - 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3
materials used as
home textiles
CO2 Selection of fabric 1 - 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3
and design for
living room, bed
room and kitchen
furnishings
CO3 Selection of floor 1 1 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3
coverings and
draperies
CO4 Finishes used for 1 1 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3
various home
textile products
CO5 Evaluation of home 1 2 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3
textile products
Overall CO 1 1 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 1 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

185
CTT346 SMART TEXTILES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students, understand the concept and construction of smart fabrics,
intelligent textiles and interactive garments

UNIT I 13
An overview on smart textiles, electrically active polymers materials- application of non-ionic
polymer gel and elastomers for artificial muscles; heat storage and thermo regulated textiles and
clothing, thermally sensitive materials, cross – linked polymers of fibre substrates as
multifunctional and multi-use intelligent material; mechanical properties of fibre Bragg gratings,
optical responses of FBG (Fibre Bragg grating) sensors under deformation; smart textile
composites integrated with optic sensors

UNIT II 9
Adaptive and responsive textile structures, bio-processing for smart textiles and clothing, tailor
made intelligent polymers for biomedical application

UNIT III 9
Smart fabrics – passive, active, very smart; classification of smart materials, concept of wearable
computing, basic structure of fabric used for integrating different electronic sensors

UNIT IV 14
Smart interactive garments for combat training, hospital and patient care; smart garments in sports
and fitness activities; smart garments for children; smart home textiles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Discuss the requirement of polymers and their properties used in smart textiles
CO2: Explain the polymers and textiles for biomedical applications
CO3: Explain the smart materials, fabrics and different electronic sensors
CO4: Describe the application of smart textiles

TEXTBOOKS
1. Sanjay Gupta., “Smart Textiles their Production and Marketing Strategies”, NIFT, New Delhi,
2000.
2. William C. Smith., “Smart Textile Coating and Laminates”, Wood Head Publishing Series in
Textiles, UK, 2010, ISBN 978-1-84569-379-4.

REFERENCES
1. Tao X. M., “Smart Fibers, Fabrics and Clothing Fundamentals and Application”, Wood Head
Publishing Ltd., October 2001, ISBN 1 855735466.
2. Mc Cann J. and Bryson D., “Smart Clothes and Wearable Technology”, Wood Head Publishing
Series in Textiles, UK, 2010, ISBN-10: 1845693574

186
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 PO3 4 5 PO6 PO7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Discuss the requirement of
CO1 polymers and their properties used 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
in smart textiles
Explain the polymers and
CO2 textiles for biomedical 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
applications
Explain the smart materials, fabrics
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
and different electronic sensors
Describe the application of smart
CO4 textiles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

Overall CO 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

187
CTT345 PROTECTIVE TEXTILES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students, understand the selection of fibre, yarn, fabric and design of
garments for different protective applications

UNIT I FIBRES, YARNS AND FABRICS FOR PROTECTIVE FABRICS 13

Characteristic requirements of fibre, yarn and fabric for flame proof, heat resistant, ballistic
resistance, electrical conduction, bacterial protection, radiation protection and radiation
contamination protection

UNIT II CHEMICAL FINISHES FOR PROTECTIVE FABRICS 5

Mechanism, chemistry, materials and methods - Flame retardant, Liquid repellent, Antistatic,
Antibacterial, UV protection and mite protection finishes

UNIT III PROTECTIVE FABRICS IN DIFFERENT APPLICATIONS 9

Protective fabrics used in the medical field and in hygiene; military combat clothing; protective
fabrics against biological and chemical warfare; textiles for high visibility; antigravity suit

UNIT IV PROTECTIVE GARMENT CONSTRUCTION 9

Garment construction - method of construction of garments according to various protective end
uses; use of accessories for protective garment; ergonomics of protective clothing

UNIT V EVALUATION OF PROTECTIVE TEXTILES 9

Standards and test method for protective fabric performance - flame retardant finishes, liquid
repellent finishes, antistatic, liquid repellent, antibacterial, UV protection, mite protection; manikins-
thermal manikins, segmented thermal manikins; evaporative resistance measurement-moisture
permeability index, skin model; concept of dynamic manikins; permeation resistance test-index of
penetration and index of repellency; liquid tight integrity and gas tight integrity
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the functional requirement of fibres, yarns and fabrics for different protective
applications
CO2: Explain the mechanism, materials and method of application of chemical finishes for
protective textiles
CO3: Explain the protective fabrics used for different applications
CO4: Elaborate the construction of protective garments
CO5: Explain the evaluation of protective textiles

TEXTBOOKS
1. Adanur S., “Wellington Sears Handbook of Industrial Textiles”, Technomic Publishing Co.
Inc., 1995, ISBN : 1 – 56676 – 340 – 1.
2. Pushpa Bajaj., and Sengupta A.K., “Protective Clothing”, The Textile Institute, 1992,
ISBN:1-870812– 44-1.

REFERENCES
1. Chellamani K. P., and Chattopadhyay D., “Yarns and Technical Textiles”, SITRA, 1999.
2. 2. Scott R.A., “Textiles for Protection”, Wood head Publishing Limited, Cambridge,
UK, ISBN :1-85573-921-6, 2005.
3. 3. Saville.B.P., “Physical Testing of Textiles”, Wood head Publishing Limited,
Cambridge, UK, ISBN :1-85573-367-6, 1999.
4. Fan Q., “Chemical Testing of Textiles”, Wood head Publishing Limited, Cambridge,
UK, ISBN :1-85573-917-8, 2005.
188
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Explain the functional requirement of
CO1 fibres, yarns and fabrics for different 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
protective applications
Explain the mechanism, materials
and method of application of
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
chemical finishes for protective
textiles
Explain the protective fabrics used
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
for different applications
Elaborate the construction of
CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
protective garments
Explain the evaluation of protective
CO5 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2
textiles
Overall CO 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

189
CTT335 COATED TEXTILES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand need for coating of textiles, different methods of
coating of textile fabrics

UNIT I MATERIALS 9
Rubber-natural and synthetic, polyvinyl chloride, polyurethanes, acrylic polymers; adhesive
treatment, radiation- cured coatings; materials and trends; textile fibres-spinning, woven fabrics,
knitted fabrics, nonwoven fabrics

UNIT II PROPERTIES 9
Rheological behavior of fluids; rheology of plastisol’s; hydrodynamic analysis of coating; clothing
comfort, impermeable coating, breathable fabrics

UNIT III COATING METHODS 9

Coating features, methods of coating- knife coating, roll coating, dip coating, transfer coating,
rotary screen printing, calendaring, hot-melt coating; general characteristics- tensile strength,
elongation, adhesion, tear resistance, weathering behavior, microbiological degradation, yellowing

UNIT IV PRODUCTS 9
Synthetic leather, architectural textiles, fluid containers, tarpaulins, automotive air bag fabrics,
carpet backing; textile foam laminates for automotive interiors; flocking fabrics for chemical
protection; thermochromic fabrics, temperature adaptable fabrics, camouflage nets metal and
conducting polymer, coated fabrics

UNIT V EVALUATION 9
Test methods for coated fabrics; environmental norms for the chemicals used in coating industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the polymers and fabrics used for coating
CO2: Discuss the property requirements of coated textiles
CO3: Classify methods of coating of textiles
CO4: Elaborate the applications of coated fabrics
CO5: Evaluate of coated fabrics

TEXTBOOKS
1. Fung. W., “Coated and Laminated Textiles”., Wood head Publishing Limited., Cambridge.,
2002., ISBN: 1 85573 576 8
2. Ghosh. S. K., “Functional Coatings”., Wiley-VCH Verlag, GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim,
2006, ISBN:3- 527-31296-X

REFERENCES
1. GuneuAkovali., Diveswar Banerjee., Sen A. K., and Dipak K. Setua., “Advances in polymer
coated textiles”, SmithersRapra, 2012
2. Ashish Kumar Sen., “Coated Textiles: Principles and Application”,
3. Technomic Publication, U.S.A.,2007, ISBN: 1420053450 | ISBN-13: 9781420053456
4. Mary Jo Waters., “Laboratory Methods for Evaluating Protective Clothing System Against
Chemical Agents”, Report no. CRDC-SP 84010, CRDC, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD,
U.S.A, 1984

190
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain the polymers, fibre
CO1 spinning and fabrics used for 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
coating
Discuss the rheology of coated
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
polymers
CO3 Classify coating methods of textiles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
Elaborate the application of coated
CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
fabrics
Evaluation of coated fabrics
CO5 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3
Overall CO 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

191
 Fundamentals of Textile Structures

CTT333 CHARACTERIZATION OF TEXTILE POLYMERS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about
 Molecular structure of the fibres.
 Characterization of fibres for physical and chemical properties.

UNIT I MOLECULAR WEIGHT 9

Polymer solution thermo dynamics; molecular weight and molecular dimensions by end group
analysis, osmometry, light scattering, viscometry, gel permeation chromatography

UNIT II MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 9

Infrared, NMR, UV–visible Raman and mass spectroscopy

UNIT III THERMAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties by differential scanning calorimetry, differential thermal analysis, thermo
gravimetry, thermo-mechanical analyzer, dynamic mechanical and di-electric analysis

UNIT IV CHROMATOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES 9

Chromatographic techniques – adsorption chromatorgraphy – TLC, GC, LC – HPLC, GPC –
hyphenated techniques

UNIT V OTHER METHODS 9

Optical and electron microscopy; SEM, TEM, X-ray scattering from polymers, birefringence,
crystallinity by density measurements
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the molecular weight of the polymers and its measurement.
CO2: Explain the molecular structure of the polymers.
CO3: Explain the measurement and analysis of thermal properties of different polymers.
CO4: Describe the characterization of textile polymers using chromatographic techniques.
CO5: Explain the characterization of textile polymers for morphology and crystallinity.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Sperling L.H., “Introduction to Physical Polymer Science”, Wiley India Private Limited,
2005, ISBN: 047170606X | ISBN-13: 9780471706069
2. Campell D., and White J.R., “Polymer characterization, Physical Techniques”,Chapman&
Hall, 1989 , ISBN: 0412271605 | ISBN-13: 9780412271601

REFERENCES
1. Gupta V.B., and Kothari V.K., “Man Made Fibre Production”, Chapman and Hall, 1985.
2. Bill Mayer., “Textbooks of Polymer Science”, 3rd ed., Wiley India Private Limited, 2007,
ISBN: 8126511109 | ISBN-13: 9788126511105
3. Stamm M., “Polymer Surfaces and Interfaces”, Springer1st Ed., 2010,ISBN: 3642093116 |
ISBN-13: 9783642093111.

192
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
Explain the molecular weight of the
CO1 polymers and its measurement. 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
Explain the molecular structure of the
CO2 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
polymers.
Explain the measurement and
CO3 analysis of thermal properties of 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
different polymers.
Describe the characterization of textile
CO4 polymers using chromatographic 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
techniques.
Explain the characterization of textile
CO5 polymers for morphology and 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1
crystallinity.
Overall CO 3 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

193
CTT334 CLOTHING COMFORT LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about the
 Important characteristics of the fabric responsible for its comfort properties.
 Different phenomena which take place in the fabric related to the comfort properties of the
fabric.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOTHING COMFORT 9

Comfort – types and definition; human clothing system, comfort perception and preferences

UNIT II PSYCHOLOGY AND NEURO PHYSIOLOGICAL COMFORT 9

Psychological comfort; neuro-physiological comfort-basis of sensory perceptions; measurement
techniques - mechanical stimuli and thermal stimuli

UNIT III THERMO PHYSIOLOGICAL COMFORT 9

Thermo physiological comfort – thermoregulatory mechanisms of the human body, role of clothing
on thermal regulations

UNIT IV MOISTURE TRANSMISSION 9

Heat and moisture transfer – moisture exchange, wearer’s temperature regulations, effect of
physical properties of fibres, behaviour of different types of fabrics

UNIT V FABICS TACTILE AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Fabric tactile and mechanical properties - fabric prickliness, itchiness, stiffness, softness,
smoothness, roughness, and scratchiness; predictability of clothing comfort performance
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the criteria for comfort of fabrics.
CO2: Discuss the psychological and physiological comfort with respect to clothing.
CO3: Describe the thermo physiological comfort of clothing.
CO4: Analyse the behaviour of different fabrics in relation to heat and moisture transfer.
CO5: Describe the properties of fabric with respect to comfort to the wearer.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Hassan M. Behery., “Effect of Mechanical and Physical Properties on Fabric Hand”, Wood
head Publishing Ltd.,2005, ISBN: 1855739186 | ISBN-13: 9781855739185
2. Li Y., “The Science of Clothing Comfort”, Textile Progress 31:1-2, Taylor and Francis, UK,
2001, ISBN: 1870372247 | ISBN-13: 9781870372244

REFERENCES
1. Laing R.M., and Sleivert G.G., “Clothing, Textile and Human Performance” Textile Progress
32:2, The Textile Institute, 2002, ISBN: 1870372514 | ISBN-13: 9781870372510.
2. ApurbaDas.,andAlagirusamy R., “Science in clothing comfort”, Wood head Publishing India
Pvt. Ltd., India, 2010, ISBN: 1845697898 | ISBN-13: 9781845697891
3. Guowen Song., “Improving comfort in clothing”, Wood head Publishing Ltd., UK, 2011, ISBN:
1845695399 | ISBN-13: 9781845695392
4. Ukponmwan J.O., “The Thermal-insulation Properties of Fabrics”, Textile Progress 24:4, 1-
54, Taylor and Francis, UK, 1993, ISBN: 1870812654 | ISBN-13: 9781870812658

194
Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain the criteria for comfort
CO1 of fabrics. 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
Discuss the psychological
CO2 and physiological comfort 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
with respect to clothing.
Describe the thermo
physiological comfort
CO3 requirements of human and 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
the role of clothing.
Analyse the behaviour of
CO4 different fabric in relation to 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
heat and moisture transfer.
Describe the low stress
mechanical properties of
CO5 fabric with respect to comfort 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3
to the wearer
Overall CO 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

195
CTT352 TEXTILE REINFORCED COMPOSITES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about
 Reinforcements, matrices used for the composites and techniques for making composites
 Manufacture and testing of composites and application of composites

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Fibre reinforced polymers materials, properties; resins - thermoset and thermo plastics, additives
release agents; composite material classification and its properties; reinforcement – matrix
interface wettability

UNIT II PREPREGS AND PREFORMS 9

Introduction; manufacturing techniques, property requirements; textile preforms - weaving, knitting
and braiding; geometrical aspects- fibre orientation, volume fraction, weight fraction and voids.

UNIT III TECHNIQUES FOR MANUFACTURE OF COMPOSITES 13

Introduction, manufacturing processes – open mould process, closed mould process and
continuous process; metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites – types, importance and
processing

UNIT IV MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF TEXTILE COMPOSITES 9

Testing of reinforced plastics – tensile, flexural, impact, interlaminar shear and compression
properties

UNIT V APPLICATION OF POLYMER COMPOSITES 5

Composites - application in aerospace, construction industry, and sports products; electrical,
polymer composite for biomedical and vibration damping
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1: Discuss the basics of composites.
CO2: Explain about the preforms, pre-pegs and their geometrical aspects.
CO3: Describe the different methods of composite making.
CO4: Explain the evaluation of characteristics of composites.
CO5: Select different types of composites for different applications.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Leonard Hollaway, “Handbook of Polymer Composites for Engineering”, Wood head
Publishing limited, 2007.
2. Long A C, “Design and Manufacture of Textile Composites”, Wood head Publishing limited,
2005

REFERENCES
1. White J R, and De S K, “Short Fiber-Polymer Composites”, Wood head Publishing
limited,1996.
2. George Lubin, “Handbook of Fiberglass and Advanced Plastics Composites”, Van No strand
Reinhold Company, New York, 1969.

196
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
Outcomes PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Discuss the basics of
CO1 composites. 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
Explain about the preforms,
CO2 pre-pegs and their 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
geometrical aspects.
Describe the different
CO3 methods of composite 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
making.
Explain the evaluation of
CO4 characteristics of 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
composites.
Select different types of
CO5 composites for different 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2
applications.
Overall CO 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

197
CTT338 HIGH PERFORMANCE FIBRES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about
• Various high performance fibres which are used as technical textiles
• Production of high performance fibres

UNIT I LINEAR POLYMER FIBRES 9

Aramid fibres - polymer preparation, spinning, structure and properties and applications;
polyethylene fibres–manufacture, fibre characteristics, properties, yarn and fabric processing and
applications

UNIT II CARBON FIBRE 9

Manufacture of PAN-based, pitch-based carbon fibres - physical properties and applications

UNIT III GLASS AND CERAMIC FIBRES 9

Glass fibres - fibre manufacture, properties; glass-fibre composites and other applications;
manufacture of ceramic fibres, siliconcarbide-based fibres, other non-oxide fibres, alumina-based
fibres, other polycrystalline oxide fibres, single-crystal oxide fibres

UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND THERMAL RESISTANCE FIBRES 12

Chlorinated fibres, fluorinated fibres, polyetherketones, polyphenylenesulphide, polyetherimide -
properties and applications; thermo plastic and thermoset polymers, aromatic polyamides and
polyaramids, semi carbonfibres, polybenzimidazole

UNIT V SPECIALITY FIBRES 6

Specialty fibres - hollow and profile fibres; blended and bi-component fibres; super absorbent
fibres
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to,
CO1: Explain the polymer preparation, properties and application
CO2: Elaborate the manufacturing, properties and application of Carbon fibres
CO3: Discuss the manufacturing, properties and application of glass and ceramic fibres
CO4: Explain the chemical and thermal resistance fibres
CO5: Discuss the application of hollow fibres, bi – component and super absorbent fibres

TEXTBOOKS
1. Kothari V.K., “Textile Fibres :Development and Innovations”, Progress in
Textiles,Vol.2,IAFL Publications,2000
2. John W. S. Hearle., “High Performance Fibres”, Wood head Publishing Ltd., Cambridge,
England, 2001, ISBN: 084931304X | ISBN-13:9780849313042

REFERENCES
1. Peebles L.H., “Carbon Fibres”, CRC Press, London,1995 Hongu T., and Phillips G.O.,
“New Fibres”, 2nd Edition, Wood head Publishing Ltd., England, 1997, ISBN: 185573334X
/ ISBN:978-1855733343

198
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Program
Course Outcome
Statement
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 PSO3
Explain the polymer preparation,
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
properties and application
Elaborate the manufacturing,
CO2 properties and application of Carbon 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
fibres
Discuss the manufacturing, properties
CO3 and application of glass and ceramic 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
fibres
Explain the chemical and thermal
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
resistance fibres
Discuss the application of hollow
CO5 fibres, bi – component and super 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3
absorbent fibres
Overall CO 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

199
CTT331 ADVANCED TESTING OF TEXTILES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 learn about the functional and technical textiles testing.

UNIT I TESTING OF MEDICAL TEXTILES 9

Testing of characteristics - bandages, sutures, wound dressings, masks, respirators, coveralls;
standards

UNIT II TESTING OF FIRE AND COLD PROTECTIVE TEXTILES 9

Testing of Transmission characteristics Moisture transmission (Vapour form and Liquid form)
Thermal transmission, testing of extreme heat, fire and cold protective clothings; standards

UNIT III TESTING OF GEO AND AUTO MOTIVE TEXTILES 9

Testing of geotextiles materials- , testing of agro textilematerials, testing of automotive textile
materials; standards

UNIT IV TESTING OF COMPOSITES AND SPORTS WEARS 9

Testing of fibre reinforced composites, testing of electromagnetic shielding textiles, testing of
active sports wears, testing of packaging materials; standards

UNIT V TESTING OF BALLISTIC AND UV PROTECTIVE TEXTILES 9

Testing of ballistic protective textiles, testing of UV protective textiles, testing of chemical
protective textiles; standards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to explain testing of
CO1: medical textile materials
CO2: thermal transmission, extreme heat and cold protective textiles.
CO3: geotextiles, automove textiles and agro textiles.
CO4: reinforced composites, electromagnetic shielding textiles, sports and packing materials.
CO5: ballistic, UV, chemical protective textiles

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Horrocks, A. Richard, and Subhash C. Anand, eds. “Handbook of technical textiles”,
Elsevier, 2000.
2. Adanur, Sabit. Wellington Sears., “Handbook of industrial textiles”, Routledge, 2017.
3. K. Slater, “Comfort Properties of Textiles”, Textile Progress, Vol. 9, No. 4, 1977.

REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Saville, “Physical Testing of Textiles,” 1999, Woodhead Publishing Ltd., U. K.
2. J. E. Booth, “Principles of Textile Testing” 1961,Heywood Books, London
3. Das, Apurba, and R. Alagirusamy, “Science in clothing comfort, ”Woodhead Publishing
India Pvt Limited, 2010.
4. K. Slater, “The Thermal Behaviour of Textiles”, Textile Progress, Vol. 8, No. 3, 1976.
5. McKenna, Henry A., John WS Hearle, and Nick O'Hear, “Handbook of fibre rope
technology,” Vol. 34. Woodhead publishing, 2004.

200
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement Program
Outcomes Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 medical textile materials 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
Thermal transmission, extreme heat
CO2 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
and cold protective textiles.
geotextiles, automove textiles and
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
agro textiles.
reinforced composites,
CO4 electromagnetic shielding textiles, sports 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
and packing materials.
ballistic, UV, chemical protective
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2
textiles
Overall CO 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

201
CTT332 ADVANCES IN TEXTILE PRINTING AND FINISHES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
To enable the students to learn the advances in the field of textile printing and finishing

UNIT I SUBLIMATION TRANSFER PRINTING 9

Mechanism of sublimation transfer printing; selection of the paper; Printing methods; dyes and
inks; Transfer prints on both man-made fibres and natural fibres; Machineries

UNIT II INKJET PRINITNG 9

Comparison with conventional printing techniques; Ink jet printing: Principles of Ink jet printing
technology: CIJ and DOD; pretreatment of substrates; inks used for printing; dye- fibre interaction;
post treatment of substrate; importance of digital colour management in inkjet printing
UNIT III FUNCTIONAL FINISHES I 9
Wetting and wicking; surface energy – concept, measurement and relevance to repellency; water
repellent, detergency and soil release concepts, soil release agents, mechanism of soil retention
and soil release; application of water repellent, soil release finishes and its assessment.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONAL FINISHES II 9

Flame retardant mechanisms, flame retarding chemicals for textile materials and testing of flame
retardant finishes; UV radiation: Factors affecting UV protection, UV protection finishes,
Measurement of UV protection. Antistatic finishes-Mechanism, Agents applied and its assessment.

UNIT V FUNCTIONAL FINISHES III 9

Antimicrobial finishes- classification, chemistry and application of antimicrobial finishes, evaluation
of antimicrobial finishes; Anti-odour and fragrance finishes, Mosquito repellent finish: application
and assessment technique.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Sublimation transfer printing
CO2: Inkjet printing technology and its application
CO3: Water repellent and soil repellent finish
CO4: UV Protection, flame retardant and antistatic finishes
CO5: Antimicrobial, antiodour and mosquito repellent finish
TEXT BOOKS
1. Miles L W C, “Textile Printing”, Society of Dyers and Colourists, Hobbs the Printers,
Hampshire, UK, 2003.
2. Shenai V A, “Technology of Printing”, Sevak Publishers, Mumbai, 1990.
3. Shore J, “Colorants & Auxiliaries”, Vol. I & II, Society of Dyers and Colourists, UK, 1990.
REFERENCES
1. Tyler D, “Textile Digital Printing Technologies”, Textile Institute Publication UK, Vol.37
No.4, 2005
2. Ujiie, “Digital Printing of Textiles”, CRC, Wood Head Publishing Ltd, UK, 2006.
3. Schindler W D and Hauser P J, “Chemical Finishing of Textiles”, The Textile Institute,
Woodhead Publishing Ltd., Cambridge, 2004.
4. Charles T, “Chemistry & Technology of Fabric Preparation & Finishing”, North Carolina
State University, USA, 1992.
5. Perkins W S, “Textile Colouration and Finishing”, Carolina Academic Press, UK, 1996.
6. Holme L, “New developments in chemical finishing of textiles”, Journal of Textile Institute,
UK, 2008.
7. Heywood D., ”Textile Finishing”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd.,2003
202
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1 PSO3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Sublimation transfer 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 - 1 2 2 3
printing
CO2 Inkjet printing 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 - 3 2 2 3
technology and its
application
CO3 Water repellent and 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 2 3
soil repellent finish
CO4 UV Protection, 2 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 2 3
flame retardant and
antistatic finishes
CO5 Antimicrobial, 2 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 3
antiodour and
mosquito repellent
finish
Overall CO 2.2 1 1 2.6 1 2.4 2.4 2 1 1 - 1.6 2 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

203
GE3751 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Sketch the Evolution of Management.
 Extract the functions and principles of management.
 Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
 Study the various HR related activities.
 Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career
planning and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership
– Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control
and performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “ Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd.,
10th Edition, 2009.

204
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25

GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus,
TQMframework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking
andFMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
Techniqueslike QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief
introduction) -- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal--
Continuous process improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier
partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability-
Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using
the findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages:
Design FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.

205
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO
14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking andFMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and
applyQFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Bester field,MaryB.Sacre,
HemantUrdhwareshe and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson
Education Asia, RevisedThird Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.
REFERENCES:
1 Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd.,2006 .

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3

GE3753 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
 Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
 Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have better
 understanding of various components of macro economics.
 Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
 Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.

206
UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9
Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives
and goals - Managerial decisions - Decision analysis.Demand - Types of demand - Determinants
of demand - Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants
of supply - Supply function -Supply elasticity.

UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9

Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function.
Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants of cost - Short run and Long run cost
curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.

UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - -
Financial Ratio Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis - Comparative
financial statements - Analysis & Interpretation of financial statements.

UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.
2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher,
Sultan Chand, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New
York, 2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 3

207
 2 3 2 2
3 2
4 2 3 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 2 2 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 2 2 1.8 2.6 2

GE3754 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to training,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors
consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.

UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.

UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege
relationships.

UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances –
Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned
in the workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human Resources", 7th
Edition, PHI, 2012.
1. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.
208
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1

GE3755 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.
 Be familiar with tools.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Be familiar with some case studies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of
knowledge management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts
and processes- management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge
management: From Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing
the Evolution of Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.

UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE SHARING 9

Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge
Markets: Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality
Assurance.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center,
Knowledge Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing
Countries).

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
209
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33

TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.

REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese
Companies Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

GE3792 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management;
contributors to management studies; various forms of business organization and trade
unions function in professional organizations.
 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in
professional organization.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of
Organization: Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative –
Public Sector Vs Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social;
Political; Legal – Trade Union: Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.

UNIT – II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - I 9

Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles;
Types; Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility –

210
Staffing: Systems Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development
(HRD) Concept and Design.

UNIT – III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - II 9

Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin)
– Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines;
Audit (External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics;
Nature; Process; Classifications.

UNIT – IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter
Group; Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-
hygiene theory; McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy
theory – Change Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model;
Sources of Resistance; Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.

UNIT – V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9

Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics
(concept, feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process
Reengineering (BPR); Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance;
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management;
contributors to management studies; various forms of business organization and
trade unions function in professional organizations.
CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

TEXTBOOKS:
1 M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2009.
2 Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1 Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2 Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India
Publications, 2009.
3 S.Chandran, “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4 Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11th
Edition, 2012.
5 S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.

211
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1

MANDATORY COURSES I

MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000
COURSE OUTLINE

UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.

UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.

UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.

UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender.
Gender and narratives.

UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.

Gender and Representation in Alternative Media.

Gender and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

212
MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC
3 000
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through an art
form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as suitable modes of
expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS

Introduction to Elements of Literature

1. Relevance of literature

a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.

b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.

c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.

d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.

2. Elements of fiction

a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.

b) Fictional modes and patterns.

c) Plot character and perspective.

3. Elements of poetry

a) Emotions and imaginations.

b) Figurative language.

c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).

d) Personification and animation.

e) Rhetoric and trend.

4. Elements of drama

a) Drama as representational art.

b) Content mode and elements.

c) Theatrical performance.

d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.

e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.

213
 3. READINGS:

1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.

2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.

3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv
Press, 1991.

4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.

5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.

3.1 Textbook:
3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:

4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular
piece of literature
5.*ASSESSMENT:
5.1HA:
5.2Quizzes-HA:
5.3Periodical Examination: one
5.4Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:

 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.

MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC

3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of
film as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over
a century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances
of a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
Theme - A: The Component of Films
214
 A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film
Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language
B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films
E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India

READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.

MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response

UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc –
Technological disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts
including social, Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster
vulnerability profile of India and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, Complex emergencies, - -, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable
development Goals

UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9

Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
215
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and
Local resources.

UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation,
rehabilitation and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management –
Compensation and Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related
policies, plans, programmers and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and
Central Level- (NDMA –SDMA-DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)

UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role
of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response
and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for
disaster Management

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response
in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

216
CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
MANDATORY COURSES II

MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA

AND SIDDHA LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health disorders

UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health -
Financial health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health -
Environmental health - Occupational/Professional heath.

Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.

Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.

Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time

Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet
according to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) -
Maintaining BMI-Importance and actions to be taken

UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day -
nutrients one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent
diet-related illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy
weight - helps to reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis –

217
hypertension – PCOD – infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart
diseases - keeps the teeth and bones strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.

Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions

Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM

Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method

UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH
as a soft therapy.

Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation
and healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.

Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory -

Pancheekarana Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-
Dosha Theory) - Udal Thathukkal

Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine

Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the
rate of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary
Prevention - To decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.

UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.
Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life -
Identifying the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training,
professional help) - Complications of stress mismanagement.
Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity
UNIT V YOGA 2+12
Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for
individuals according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and
prevention of health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

218
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your
Body,
by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California

REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard D.
Roberts A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
2. The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D,
Published by The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue,
Suite 1200, New York, NY 10001

1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to%20c
ook.
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-publications/benefits-
of-healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-
additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-in-
ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
 Learn the importance of different components of health
 Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
 Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
 Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health

219
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC
3 0 00
UNIT-I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES
Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in
history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.

UNIT-II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S.
Irfan Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.

UNIT-III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.

UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest

UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA

Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions

UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00
Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)

OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of
different systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.

COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)
220
 (Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)

Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)

(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)

Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)

Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.

(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)

Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)

Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)

(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)

Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)

(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)

Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)

Conclusion (2 lectures)

Total lectures: 39

Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books

Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.

GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy, political
and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with some case
studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and how they have fared.

221
MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC
3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its
main organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the
Constitution of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and
issues concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the
contemporary context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.

TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.

Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.

Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.

1857 and the national awakening.

1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.

Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future
scenario. What can we do?
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building
in India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in
correct perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the
system with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who
is often left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of
dissatisfaction and difficulties for the system.

SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
222
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.

MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.
UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES
Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS

UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006

UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment

UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety-
Toxic gas Release

UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES

Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk
Assessment- Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification
and Risk Assessment
Course outcomes on completion of this course the student will be able:
 Understand the basic concept of safety.
 Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
 Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
 Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
 Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.

TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
223
 2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education

REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA

ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS L T P C

202 3
OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
224
1. Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
2. Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
3. Introduce machine learning fundamentals
4. Study of supervised learning algorithms.
5. Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.

UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or
uniform-cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search

UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6

Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game
theory - Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search
for CSP

UNIT III LEARNING 6

Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning
models - Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and
inductive bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under
fitting, Bias and Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression

UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)

UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
 Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
225
 The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be
used by designing good user interface
 Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL PERIODS: 60
TEXT BOOK
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,

REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.

OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
OBJECTIVES:
 To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand
physical and logical design of IOT
 To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
 To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
 To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi
open platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT

UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)

UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6

IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.

226
UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7
IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the
Cloud.

UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7

Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system

OUTCOMES:
CO 1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO 2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO 3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO 4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO 5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TOTAL PERIODS:60
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015

REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle
Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet

227
OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC
2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model
– presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic
statistical descriptions of Data

UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9

Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions
– Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data –
Data manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data –
Hierarchical indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations –
Working with time series – High performance

UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis

UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn

UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS

LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression

228
6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.

Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.

TOTAL PERIODS:60
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”,
Manning Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.

REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea
Press,2014.

CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human
Auditory System.

UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface

229
Deformation – Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management.

UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6

VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in
Robotics – Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.

UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5

Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures
over them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full
haptic interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL PERIODS:60
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2:Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3:Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4:Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5:Develop AR/VR applications in different domains

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003

230
 CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
5.

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.60 2.40 2.00 3.00 - - - 2.80 2.20 1.80 2.60 2.80 1.80 2.20

OPEN ELCTIVE III

OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Description:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.

Objectives:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication

UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage –
Synonyms-antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly
confused words – Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.

UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences
– Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement –
Voice – Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.

UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.

UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types

231
of essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.

UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases –
Interactive communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions
– Giving an oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself -
Utterance – Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
 identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
 understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
 communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
 write topic based essays with precision and accuracy

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.

Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%

TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.
232
Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/

OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project
Management & Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily Progress
Report-The state of the industry with respect to its management practices -construction project
phases - The problems with current construction management techniques.

UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in construction
industry - Waste Elimination.

UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact – Traditional
construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction and workflow
reliability – Work structuring – Production control.

UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based production
– Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly planning meeting-
Daily Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in time.

UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in design -
Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) –
Sustainability through lean construction approach.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from manufacturing
industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques
and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.

REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability agenda,
CIRIA, 2013.

233
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way, Springer,
2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing lean in
construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and Assessment
of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005

OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 . to understand the importance of sustainable development
 to acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
 to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9

Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects
of Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes

UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development,
Non-renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability,
Nuclear resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development:
Programme and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators

UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies

UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution,
Environmental Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal
Protection of Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing
environmental laws, Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS

234
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining
sustainable development
CO2 have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO 3 present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO 4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO 5 understand the environmental legislations

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.

OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT-I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance

UNIT-II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,

UNIT-III (9)
Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, etc.

UNIT- IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors,
E‐governance

UNIT-V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.
235
CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
2 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
3 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
4 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
5 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.

UNIT – I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy
status-Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy
consumption - Future energy plans

UNIT – II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.

UNIT – III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine –
Wind turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues -
Applications.

UNIT – IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical
conversion-mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration
–- Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol
production - Applications.

UNIT – V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants –
Applications - Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707

236
REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems

UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9

Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies

UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit

UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9

Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design

UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution
concept; explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and
feasibility. Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution

237
concepts

UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
● Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
● Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
● Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario
TEXT BOOKS
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos,
(2014), Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.

REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85

MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model

UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9 Hours

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering -
Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.

238
UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9 Hours
.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength –
Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally
Induced Failure Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis -
Manufacturing Process Verification.

UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9 Hours

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis
– Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.

UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9 Hours

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques
for Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by
step procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9 Hours

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry.
Case studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights
–Trade Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system compatibility
in reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Analyze the various legal aspect
 Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.

239
OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING L TP C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.

UNIT – I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability

UNIT – II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental
issues pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce
costs - Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability

UNIT – III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.

UNIT – IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT – V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.

240
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016,
ISBN-13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN:
978-1-848-21212-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United
States, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub system
design and hybrid vehicle control.

UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle.
Various Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric
Vehicle Recharging and Refuelling Systems.

UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick
Charging devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell.
Ultra capacitors. Battery Management System.

241
UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9
Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance
motors working principle, construction and characteristics.

UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes

UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different
configurations of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation
modes - Control Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on
specification of electric and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
2. Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
3. Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
4. Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
5. Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.

REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
242
  Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.

UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6

History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity
profile - Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and
geometry - Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.

UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.

UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10

Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.

UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10

History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.

REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.

OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management’
243
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9

Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises -
Decision Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and
staff - Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement -
Performance appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing
human factor - Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling
techniques, productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.

UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9

Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception -
Organizational Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories -
Process Theories - Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and
approaches.

UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process -
Barriers to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal
characteristics – Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role
in Group Decision, Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations
and conflict, Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal -
Organizational Structures Organizational Change and Development -Change Process –
Resistance to Change - Culture and Ethics.

UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal
REFERENCES:
Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008

244
 CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6

OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its
techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function

UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.

UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9

Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and
exponentially weighted moving average control charts.

UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.

UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

245
 PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1

OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1:To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
2:To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
3:To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
4:To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
5:To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and
quality-based study programmes

UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the
properties of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural
materials on fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.

UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9

Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.

UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local
barriers; Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low
combustible, Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight
sealing of doors;

UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged
structures- Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair
techniques- repair methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel
structural members, Repair to masonry structures.

UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs
- Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
246
 TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2:Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating
of a building.
CO3:To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4:To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5:Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford, UK,2009.
REFERENCES:
3. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
4. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
5. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
6. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -

OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
 Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes
and standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given
application
247
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9
Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical
testing, Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental
factors, visual perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and
fibroscopes – light sources and special lighting.

UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.

UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations,
calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9

Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real
Time, CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure
charts, Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
2. Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
3. Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
4. Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for
better evaluation.
5. Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the
influence of various parameters on the testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.

248
 2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.

PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR351 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
2. Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret
and develop programs.
3. Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
4. Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
5. Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9

Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges –
Eddy Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.
UNIT – II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.

UNIT – III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9

Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.
249
UNIT – IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters
and Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.

UNIT – V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics,
Stages of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design
Concepts with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with
microprocessor.
CO 4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO 5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with
the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and
Hall, 1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

250
ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
2. To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
3. To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its
kinematics.
4. To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in
robots.
5. To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in
engineering systems.

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and
classification – specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load –
Robot Parts and their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.

UNIT – II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9

Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees
of freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation
matrices, translation and rotation matrices.

UNIT – III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo
Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of
All These Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic
Grippers, Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection
and design considerations of a gripper

UNIT – IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9

Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and
compliance mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and
digitizing image data – signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing
and analysis – data reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other
algorithms, applications – Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.

UNIT – V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9

Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and
medical fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.

251
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
CO3: Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end
effectors compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision
system.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ganesh.S.Hedge,”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. Mikell.P.Groover , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications”
McGraw Hill 2ND edition 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.
3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India
reprint, 2010.

OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts

UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.

252
UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10
Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.

UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9

Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.

UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.

UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust
production- Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket

TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. . E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS
Kataraia & sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989

OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation

UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
253
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s
Boltzmann law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities

UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.

UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital
perturbations and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne
platforms and Space borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and
Geosynchronous satellites – Lagrange Orbit.

UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites

UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9

Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image
classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO 1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO 2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO 3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO 4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO 5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American
Society of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van
Zyl, 2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011

254
CO-PO MAPPING

Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions

OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural
benefits, educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility
benefits.

UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9

Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and
plant nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen
garden, hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants

UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9

Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban beekeeping

UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable
for roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops

255
UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden
wastes- solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like insecticide,
pesticides and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences the
crop growth on roof tops
2. Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
3. Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
4. Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
5. Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.

REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0269749103002458#aep-section-id24.
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle
land and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.

CO-PO MAPPING

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall

correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 2 1 1
Complex Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill

256
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.

OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.

UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9

Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.

UNIT II CONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9

Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.

UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -
–Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.

UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects

UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9

Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak
detection - Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection –
Fixtures and fittings, systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1: an understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public
health
CO2: the ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: the knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: an ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: an insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system

257
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun K.Jain, Ashok K.Jain, “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication
private limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.

REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons,
1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. E.W.et al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, S.Chand and Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 1998.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3

1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
 To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical
vehicles (HEVs)

UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC
and AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of
special machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.

UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three
phase inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.

258
 UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9
Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction
motor and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives

UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal
Combustion Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) –
Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches,
Transmission and Brakes.

UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF

VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory
control - Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode -
regeneration mode - series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3

REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7 th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition,
Wiley, 2012

259
 OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
2. Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
3. Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
4. Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
5. Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.

UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.

UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: -
Hardware and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
260
 2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and
Applications, PHI publication

REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20
Controllers%20Programming%20Methods.pdf
4. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9

OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns in
India with focus on traditional foods.

UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9

Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions
on food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.

UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9

Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.

261
UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9
Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have
gone Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and
preserves, beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods

UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and
garlic pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.

UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes:
East West Books, 2001.

OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This
course will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the
producer, manufacturer and consumer.

UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods,
sea weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives;
need and significance of processing these foods.

UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of
raw and processed foods.

UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and
262
curing with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion
cooking, snack foods.

UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.

UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.

TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.

OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.

UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.

263
UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL
INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL).
Geographical Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.

UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.

UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World
Trade Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related
Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
C1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
C2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
C3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
C4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
C5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
C6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on
International Society

TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law,
Practice and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T.
CIPRA, NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.

CO – PO MAPPING
IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO11 PO
0 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
264
 C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2

OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 03
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.

UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8

Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.

UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10

Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.

UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10

Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice-
clusters of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction
methods, thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 - understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 – able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 – describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 – understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 - develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.

265
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
3.William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.
REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge,
2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis,
Properties and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010
Course articulation matrix
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 understand the basic 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
properties such as
structural, physical,
chemical properties of
nanomaterials and
their applications
CO2 acquire knowledge 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
about the different
types of nano material
synthesis
CO3 describes about the 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
shape, size,structure
of composite nano
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
different
characterization
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
knowledge in the
application of
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1

266
OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer
electronics

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity
of Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.

UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.

UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial
fluid, ‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization-
En route to Nanotechnology.

UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels
and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations
and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.

UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9

Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs.
Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of
functional material.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).

REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.

267
OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND LTPC
PETROCHEMICALS 3003
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical products.

UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of
Petroleum - Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.

UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and
Air Blowing of Bitumen

UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment
Processes, Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of
Sulphur Compounds in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene,
Propylene, Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of
Aromatics.

UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce
more petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition., McGraw Hill, New York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.

REFERENCES
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers

268
CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 understand and analyse the energy data of industries
 carryout energy accounting and balancing
 conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 utilise the available resources in optimal ways

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.

UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value,
Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1: Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2: Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for
complete combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at
www.energymanagertraining.com. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency
(BEE), a statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon

269
 Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987

OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs.
metals and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular weight,
viscosity and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset processing.
Additives for plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers, UV stabilizers,
lubricants, impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and plasticizers.
Compounding: plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.

UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism:
process variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture, shark
skin, bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown and cast
films. Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and its
applications. Applications of extrusion and new developments.

UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected area
-Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction of
moulding process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs. plunger
type injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection moulding vs.
other plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding techniques - Introduction to
trouble shooting

UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of
terms-Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process cycle,
Inter relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure requirements.
Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of compression mould-

270
positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their correction- Finishing of
mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press capacity-Integral moulds and
auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot transfer, plunger transfer and
screw transfer moulding techniques, advantages over compression moulding

UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow moulding.
Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance. Thermoforming: principle,
vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting: working principle, types and
applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
 Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
 Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the
same
 Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
 Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product

REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad Reinhold
Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS Publishers
and Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley (1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,
Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).

OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals,
271
Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -
Classification of systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant&
Time-invariant,Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9
Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9
Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of
DTFT - Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3:characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4:characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5:compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002

REFERENCES :
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB”,
McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
C 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
O

272
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator

UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model –
Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source
follower – Gain and frequency response- High frequency analysis.

UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.

UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback
Amplifiers – positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley,
Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.

UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power
amplifier using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits

TEXT BOOKS :
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th
Edition, 2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7 th
Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES :
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd
Edition, 2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989

273
 3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1

CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of products
and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product based
on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the hardware,
software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at the
optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to validate
and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer

UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability Matrix
and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System
Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept Screening
& Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics
and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of
Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing
– Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration,
Testing, Certification and Documentation

274
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus Academia
–The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development processes -
Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and
Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and
Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business Context
 Work independently as well as in teams
 Manage a project from start to finish

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill, Eleventh
Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.

275
CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology

UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra aortic
balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle, prosthetic
heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.

UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.

UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9

Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking
techniques, SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based
hearing aids.

UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis,
feedback in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three Volume
Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match Project,
Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition, 2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-323-
662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-Blackwell
April 2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1

276
 CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.

OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques
to solve them.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer programming
problems.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic programming
problems.
 determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M
Method – Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .

UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation
model – Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of
L.P.P by dynamic programming .

UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
 Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop
a linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for
solving linear programming problems.

277
  analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
 solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
 conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
 determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth
Edition , New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s
Outlines – TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University
Press, New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi ,
2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw
Hill, Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.

278
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9
Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.

UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.

UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.

UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
 The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the
text

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier
Publications , New Delhi , 2002.

REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers” ,
John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition , 2006.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -

OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
279
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.

UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss
elimination method - Gauss Jordan method.

UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence
and dependence - Basis and dimension.

UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9

Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.

UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.

UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition –
QR decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
1. Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
2. Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
3. Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
4. Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
5. Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.

REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi,
4th Edition, 2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.

280
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and
their pro and cons for living organisms.

UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.

UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation methods,
fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.

UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu,
Malaria, Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.

UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.

UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Microbes and their types
2. Cultivation of microbes
3. Pathogens and control measures for safety
4. Microbes in different industry for economy.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi,
India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,
1996.
281
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse
background in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various
biomolecules and their metabolism.

UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.

UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature
and classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.

UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide
bond– Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein.
Introduction to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.

UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.

UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9

Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know the
importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
W.H.Freeman and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied
(P) Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
5. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y Doi.pp
693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.

REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.
282
OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
To understand the signalling mechanisms.
Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
division and development.

UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.

UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome,
Nucleus and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.

UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation,
transport ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile
carriers and pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell
respiration.

UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of
cell cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell
junction, cell cycle checkpoints.

UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional
DNA replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA
synthesis: Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code-
Steps in translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.

283
REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.
Molecular Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.

OPEN ELECTIVE IV

OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.

UNITI 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.

UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience –
Plagiarism – Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.

UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.

UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.

UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
 Write effective project reports.
 Use statistical tools with confidence.
 Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
 Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
 Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.

284
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

REFERENCES
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition,
Prentice Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance
(2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.

OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
 To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management Principles -
Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World Water Forums.

UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors on
water resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses - IWRM
relevance in water resources management.

UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private sector
involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.

UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood -
Water management in the context of climate change.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and inclusive
development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on conceptual
framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
285
 On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management
techniques towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated
ways of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among the
alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and policy.
John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “ Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume I,
Sage Publications, 2006.

REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm, Sweden.
2002.
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
http://www.pacificwater.org/userfiles/file/IWRM/Toolboxes/introduction%20to%20iwrm/Tutorial
_text.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, https://sdgs.un.org/goals.

OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on numerical methods that will come in handy to solve numerically
the problems that arise in engineering and technology. This will also serve as a precursor for
future research.

UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value
problems: Given's method - Householder's method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for
continuous data (upto 3rd degree).

UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9

Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -
Corrector Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value
problems - Orthogonal Collocation method.

UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .
286
UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of
characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme –
Stability of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for nonlinear equations,
system of linear equations and eigenvalue problems;
CO2: understand the interpolation theory;
CO3: understand the concepts of numerical methods for ordinary differential equations;
CO4: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for elliptic equations;
CO5: understand the concepts of numerical methods for time dependent partial differential
equations

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random variables
with applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
287
  To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.

UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.

UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions - Stationary
Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.

UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.

UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.

UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs –
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
 Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
 Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.

288
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -

OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.

UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.

UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.

UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series
queues – Open Jackson networks.

UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9

Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution –
Time - dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.

UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
 Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time
in a probabilistic manner.
 Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.

289
  Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and
availability analyses by using theoretical approach.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,1983.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9

Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production and
operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production
/operations management - production as an organisational function, decision making in production
Operations research

UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions
and significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry

UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and
techniques – Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of

290
production process systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control
Functions – Planning phase- Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning

UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance –
Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant
Layout: meaning – characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design -
Optimisation and Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)- REL
(Relationship) Chart – Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting
methods.

UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems
and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management:
Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control
Chart (X , R , p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality
awards - Supply Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able :
CO 1 To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for
business owners.
CO 2 To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO 3 To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by entrepreneurs
in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling , Production and Operations in industries.

REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan
India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.

OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.

UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9

Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for dealing
with missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.

291
UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9
Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function –
Validation of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.

UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation
models, Longitudinal studies.

UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
 Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
 Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the
results correctly with detailed and useful information.
 Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
 Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including thoughtful
and convincing details.
 Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘

REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002

OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM),
and its business opportunities.
 To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
 To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
 To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting
processes.
 To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications:
Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace,
Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.
292
UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9
Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and
bottom up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) -
Process - Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.

UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials
- Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.

UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.
Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.

UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol
DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for
Prototyping and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-
56990-582-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN
:9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United
States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
293
 5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.

CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
2 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
3 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
4
development
To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note), Component
material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring of NPD applying
Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials), Engg. BOM & Manufacturing
BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like SAP, MS Dynamics, Oracle ERP
Cloud – QFD.

UNIT – II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various manufacturing
process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5 Axis, ), Fabrications,
Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical properties and their test report
preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA, Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis,
Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and Solidification analysis.

UNIT – III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function Team)
discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool making, Machining
– Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection – Various Inspection
methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring), Lay out marking and Cut
section analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of details to machine shop and
CAM programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample submission with PPAP documents.

UNIT – IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness
proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for testing
frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with simulation
results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.

UNIT – V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop floor.
Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models, Sand cores for
foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model –
Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application and its advantages in
NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
294
 1. Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
2. Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing process.
3. Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
4. Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
development
5. Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Product Development – Sten Jonsson
2. Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger

REFERENCES:
1. Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
2. Change by Design
3. Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
4. Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
5. Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices

UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives

UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9

SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development -
understanding Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API -
Introduction to Cloud services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud

295
- Embedding ML models to Apps - Deploying application.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept
generation - Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D
Modeling Tools - Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning
& Tolerancing

UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical
Prototyping; 3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive
manufacturing

UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with
simulation tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
● Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
● Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
● Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology

TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)
REFERENCES
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204

MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc.
for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical,
296
electrical properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.

UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS: 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro
engines, micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.

UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.

UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
 Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
 Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
 Apply suitable machining process
 Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
 Apply metrology for micro system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005

OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
 Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
 Interpret costing concepts with project execution
 Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
 Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management

297
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9
Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential
cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’

UNIT – II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and
nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and
documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts

UNIT – III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between
Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis,
Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle
Costing

UNIT – IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.

UNIT – V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning
Curve Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.

REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler
publisher, 1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.

298
AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTP
C
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students to understand the working and characteristics
of different types of batteries and their management .

UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9

Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging. Characteristics-
SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other Batteries-NCM and
NCA Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.

UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal Resistance.
Cloud based and Local Smart charging.

UNITIII BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks

UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.

UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1 Battery
Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex Ray-
CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and Model-
Based Design.
TOTAL =45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
2. Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
3. Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
4. Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
5. Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion
batteriesin Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”
ARTECH House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
299
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet
AU3008 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor and
actuators used in automotive vehicles.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9

Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and standards-
Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable error-
Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.

UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT

UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.

UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type ratings
for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz. Solenoid,
relay, stepper motor etc.

UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
TOTAL =45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
2. Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and flow.
3. Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
4. Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
5. Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin DhaneshN.Manik
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.

REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013

300
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.

OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values –
Mission design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch
vehicle integrity.

UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9

Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for
stages and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.

UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.

UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing
– Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems
in space environment

UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9

Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
 Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
 Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
 interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
 Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
 Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.

301
OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
2. Toi mpart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
3. To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
4. To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
5. To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business strategies.

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9

Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's
TheoryXandTheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-
LeadershipStyles,Socialresponsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures:
Basic concepts related to Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.

UNITII OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass
Production),Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement -
BusinessProcessReengineering(BPR)-
StatisticalQualityControl:controlchartsforVariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance
Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores
Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing,
Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.

UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9

Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceApprais
al, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time,
Project Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).

UNIT V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9

Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Cardas Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Plananorganizationalstructureforagivencontextintheorganisationtocarryoutproductionoperatio
nsthroughWork-study.
CO2:Surveythemarkets,customersandcompetitionbetterandpricethegivenproductsappropriatey
302
CO3:Ensurequalityforagivenproduct or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5

TEXTBOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,OxfordUniversityPress,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines,
Biztantra,2007.
4. P.VijayKumar,N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.

REFERECES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic
Management Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo:Modern Management,2012.

OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit
consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of
a new design.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.

303
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and
expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production
planning systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II)
and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.

REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university
press, 2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE,
2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition,
Excel books 2007

304
 PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8

OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in creating and
enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and Operations
Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas of a firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain
Management

UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative and Quantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing
capacity alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II
and ERP. Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout –
Principles, Types, Planning tools and techniques.

UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9

Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues.
Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.

UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9

Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control.
Purchasing – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis.
Stores Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.

UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers –
nature, importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling –
Johnson‟sAlgorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
305
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in enabling
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business
environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for
Production and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements and
developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3

TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano,
Operations andSupply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western
CengageLearning, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,
2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.

OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
2. Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health and
safety
3. Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates

306
4. Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
5. Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.

UNIT II MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.

UNIT III OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and development
of training programs.Training methods and strategies types of training.Evaluation and review of
training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training,
Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .

UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9

Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA, Process
Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA Standards,
Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of Industrial safety,
role of safety department,

UNIT-V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

i. Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of
radiation intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive
waste, Control of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on the
auditory system and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries, Effect of
different gases and particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health, Vibration: effects.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing
systems and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .

REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
307
 2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council
of India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth-
Heinemann Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -

OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical process
plants.
 Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to prevent
unwanted release of energy.
 Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and others
to serious harm.
 Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of
chemicals and pharmaceuticals.
 Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits in
force and with the radioactive releases.

UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure and
temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous
chemicals and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals, hazards
during transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.

UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9

Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process hazard,
Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies, Self -
heating hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and instability of
chemicals, Thermochemical screening,

UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey, preliminary
design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus continuous operation,
factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications - reliability and safety in

308
 designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup and shutdown - non
destructive testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency safety devices - scrubbers
and flares- new concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure vessel testing standards-
Inspection techniques for boilers and reaction vessels.

UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats used
- methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -standards
operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column, reactors,
pressure vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure, temperature, Flow rate
and humidity on operations - corrosion and control measures- condition monitoring - control
valves - safety valves - pressure reducing valves, drains, bypass valves, inert gases. Chemical
splashes, eye irrigation and automatic showers.

UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent them.
CO5Develop thorough knowledge about

TEXT BOOK
1. David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3rd
Edition,2014
2. Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015

REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London,
1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago,
1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van
Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1996.
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing,
2006

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2
309
OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
magnetic applications
2. Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
3. Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
4. Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
5. Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.

UNIT- I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength, breakdown
voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid,
liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of ferromagnetic materials in
static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric
materials, pyroelectric materials.

UNIT – II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent
magnets, ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis

UNIT – III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication and
engineering applications.

UNIT – IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.

UNIT – V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials -
photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro
optic modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
2. Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
3. Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
4. Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
5. Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and Francis, 2
nd illustrated edition, 2017.
310
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications, 2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
PO1 PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO11 PO12
0 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2

OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
2. Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
3. Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
4. Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise the
nanomaterials
5. Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their mechanical,
electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.

UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity,
grain growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.

UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.

UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-ray
absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their application
to nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress analysis
311
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
2. Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
3. Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
4. Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
5. Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.

REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
2. To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
3. To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
4. To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
5. To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting

UNIT – I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of fluids
- Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of flow -
Friction loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping Theory
– Pump Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages,
312
Performance, Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps –
Problems.

UNIT – II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control
valves – Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications –
Accessories : Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols –
Problems.

UNIT – III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.

UNIT – IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit –
Cascade method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems,
Introduction to fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits

UNIT – V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool handling
in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO 2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO 3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO 4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO 5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1997.

313
REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw Hill,
2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill, 2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press, 2015.

OMR353 SENSORS L TPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
2. To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
3. To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
4. To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
5. To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data acquisition
system.

UNIT – I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors –
Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals,
PWM and PPM.

UNIT – II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical,
Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range
Sensors - Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF
Beacons.

UNIT – III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement –
Force and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation,
and Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors –
Compass, Gyroscope and Inclinometers.

UNIT – IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9

Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor,
RTD, Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart
Sensors.

314
UNIT – V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9
Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement - DC
and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter and
Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0. 0. 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average 8 8
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

315
ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
2. To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
3. To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
4. To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
5. To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9

Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles

UNIT – II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot
Constraints – Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of
Freedom – Path and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots

UNIT – III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed
Sensors – Camera - Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.

UNIT – IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation -
Continuous Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization
- Landmark-Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems -
Route-Based Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous Localization and
Mapping (SLAM).
UNIT – V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9
Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition -
Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for
desired applications.

TEXTBOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
316
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea,
Air, and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.

MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LTPC

3003
COOURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
2. To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
3. To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
4. To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
5. To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types

UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing,
stern tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet
propulsion , screw propulsion.

UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel -
stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water
sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.

UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects
of fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations
- effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.

UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.

UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits
of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of
rudders, Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
317
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5 2/2 4/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 1/1= 2/2= 1/1= 1/1= 5/5= 5/5=
g =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1 1

OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire
1. Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
2. Familiarization on types of merchant ships
3. Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
4. Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
5. Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HYDROSTATICS 9

Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged bodies-
Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.

UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil
tankers- Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gas carriers -
Chemical tankers - Passenger ships

UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9

Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel
sandwich panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium alloys,
Aluminium alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber Reinforced
Composites

UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8

Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and its
effects on propeller

318
UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9
Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from
Ships ) , MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on Standards
of Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies Administration
authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would
1. Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships
2. Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
3. Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
4. Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine propeller
and rudder
5. Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J.Eyres, “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing,
USA,2015
2. Dr.DA Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications,2000

REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing,USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016

OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
1. Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
2. Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
3. Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
4. Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
5. Be aware of ship propellers and steering system

UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9

Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board
ships – Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems

UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge of
Air starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil system
and cooling water system

319
UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9
Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement of
engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages, limitations and
applications

UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler on
board ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler mountings and
accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories

UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9

Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers,
Controllable pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram
steering gear, Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
1. Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
2. Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
3. Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
4. Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
5. Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2011
2. J.K.Dhar, “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai, 2011
3. K.Ramaraj, “ Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Alan L.Rowen, “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute of
Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. A.S.Tambwekar, “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine
Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2015

CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics of drone concepts
2. To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of
drone
3. To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
4. To know about the various applications of drone
5. To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses-
Drone business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and
employability

320
UNIT – II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9
Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.

UNIT – III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled
environment- Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage
capacity -Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications

UNIT – IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in
delivering mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of
transmission lines and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing

UNIT – V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9

The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization-
Drone license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in
swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO5: Createthe programs for various drones

CO-PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc,
2016

REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
321
 ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.

OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.

UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID data
models.

UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input –
Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats - Attribute
Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration

UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy, temporal
accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –Interoperability - OGC -
Spatial Data Infrastructure

UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion -
Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs. Desktop GIS-
distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill
Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.

322
REFERENCES:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006

CO – PO – PSO MAPPING: GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM

Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
Design solutions 3 3 3 3 3

OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and
principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing overall
business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial characteristics-
Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation and commercialization
of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship development- Globalization and the
emerging business entrepreneurial environment.

UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements- Provisions
related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on Agriculture (AOA)-
Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary and phyto-sanitary
(SPS) measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).

323
UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9
Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity ratios-
leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based industries-Project-
Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted measures-Payback
period-proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost
Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity
analysis.

UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH

PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-up
managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of Indian
social, political system and their implications for decision making by individual entrepreneurs-
Economic system and its implication for decision making by individual entrepreneurs.

UNITV ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT

SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT analysis-
Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship. Government policy on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture capital (VC), contract
framing (CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian farm
machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
2. Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
3. Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
4. Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
5. Identify the financial institutions

TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt limited, New
Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.

REFERENCES
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business, Prentice
Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins University,
Press, London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall, Upper
Saddal Rover, New Jersey.

324
CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 1 1 1
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving approach
1 2 1 1 1 1
in agriculture with proper knowledge
and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity using
modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 1 2 1
linkage.

OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of Classification
and their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters; Study of important
families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9

Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of Taxon,
Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom, Invertebrates,
Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.

UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species, Criteria
for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and Protozoa);

325
Criteria for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical Methods of
Microbial Diversity Analysis

UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9

Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List; Factors
affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity, Dispersal,
Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable Utilization of
Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.

UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9

In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany & Embryology.
S. Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A.
(2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case, 13th
Edition 2019

REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.

OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

326
OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9

Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory –
Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block
diagram reduction–Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II
order system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots – Determination
of Transfer Function from Bode plot.

UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist stability
criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode – Closed
loop frequency response.

UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous time
systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.
REFERENCES
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First
Impression2010.
327
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3

OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
2. To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
3. Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
4. To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
5. To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial Automation
system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). Industrial bus
systems : Modbus & Profibus

UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.

UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement and
control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process related
interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data transfer
techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system,
Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication and
networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation,
Application of PLC to process control industries.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer
Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards

328
 3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th Edition,
2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New
York, 2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi,
2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning, 3 rd
Edition,2005.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
3. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1

329
OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
The course aims to
 acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment
UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical and
electromagnetic properties.

UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate curves,
calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray, vacuum,
osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat pump and
freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers

UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s,
Kick’s and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal
types, crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills,
buhr mill, tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting
machines (slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)

UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w- or
medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting devices,
other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and particulate
solids.

UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate of
filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-pressure
filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press, rotary filters,
centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General considerations, materials
for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration, concentration, polarization, processing
variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis,
mode of operation, and applications; Membrane separation methods, demineralization by electro-
dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties to
develop new technologies for processing and preservation.

330
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food
Science & Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie
John Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th Ed.
Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food
Processing Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's
Chemical Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.

OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry
and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards

UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants), Food
Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in warehousing,
storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice,
birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and
Implementation

UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality
control. Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.

UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and
processing materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food
inspection and Food Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and
exposure response modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system to
monitor food safety, risk communication

UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security in
Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization (OIE),
International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)

UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow Committees
etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

331
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry and
food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world

REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons
Publication, 2003

OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical
nature and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6

Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition, classification,
list of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food,
plants, animals and microbes.

UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans,
lycopene, chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as lycopene,
isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals
- stability, analytical and labelling issues.

UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different in
vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the antioxidant
activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising phytochemical
release by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during technological treatments,
new food grade peptidases from plant sources.

UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11

The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3 fatty
acid and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder, Cancer,
CVD, Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic, prebiotic
and synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role and use in
obesity and nervous system disorders.

UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd
332
 Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications.
2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd (United
Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /
Elsevier, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis,
2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson
(Author), Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood
head Publ., 2000
5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.

COURSE OUTCOME - NUTRACEUTICALS

CO 1 acquire knowledge about the Nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO 2 acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes
CO 3 attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical
components and formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO 4 distinguish the various In vitro and In vivo assessment of Antioxidant activity of
compounds from plant sources.
CO 5 gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals
in the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO 6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national
and international level.

CO – PO MAPPING
NUTRACEUTICALS
Course PO1 PO2 PO PO PO PO6 PO PO8 PO PO10 PO11 PO12
outcome 3 4 5 7 9
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1

333
OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC
30 0 3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and nuclear
power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion processes,
fluidized bed combustion.

UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating,
solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power
generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills,
types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation, wind power
in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy
conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte
fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like thermal energy
storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat exchangers,
distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate based
on local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.

REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
334
 2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi,
1981.
Course articulation matrix

Cour Program Outcomes

se Statements PO PO PO PO P PO P PO P P PO P PS PS PS
Outc 1 2 3 4 O5 6 O 8 O O 11 O O1 O2 O3
7 9 10 12
ome
s
CO1 Students will be able to 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
describe the fundamentals
and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources
and their differences
compared to fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the various
fields of energy engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and choose
the most appropriate based
on local conditions.
CO4 Explain the technological 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
basis for harnessing
renewable energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and emerging
trends within the field of
renewable energy
technologies and to develop
in-depth technical
understanding of energy
problems at an advanced
level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.

UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational spectroscopy

335
UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT
SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods

UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9

Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells

UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis, Overview
of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and Automotive
catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface functionalization and
clusters in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate oscillations and
spatiotemporal pattern formation

UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9

Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth modes,
Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques, Catalytic
growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its
application in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and
chemistry behind surface phenomena
TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.

REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.

OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the
industrial environment.
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade union
safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.
336
UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9
Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards - Exposure
pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages and limitations
of environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control measures for
occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria -
Effects on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise, radiation and excessive
stress.

UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work for
manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process and
System Safety.

UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major
accident hazard control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health
and Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review –
Elements of Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
 Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
 Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
 What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure
the protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee

OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations, heat
transfer operations and mass transfer operations.

UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS 9

Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids &
Newton’s Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric equation
and pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity equation, Euler’s
equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent; Reynolds experiment; Flow
through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille equation (no derivation). Flow
through stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation – Equipment (cyclones, thickeners)
Conceptual numericals.

UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS 9

Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with
derivations, flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating pumps),

337
Energy calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of comminute
products, sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids – characterization of solid
particles, average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual numerical of differential and
cumulative analysis. Size reduction, crushing laws, working principle of ball mill. Filtration & types,
filtration equipments (plate and frame, rotary drum). Conceptual numericals.

UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9

Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and multilayer
walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and Natural
convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference, individual and
overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and drop wise (no
derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and tube heat
exchanger (with working principle and construction with applications).

UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER 9

Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids at rest
and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity, Mass
transfer coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.

UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS 9

Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction and
basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using McCabe
Thiele method.Drying- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual numerical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
 State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
 Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size reductions,
conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
 Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the
problems.
 Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.

TEXTBOOK(S)
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter
Harriot McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw Hill
New York 1997

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and L.B.
Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna Publishers,
Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed

OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
338
  Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials in
the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic
and thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked
structures. General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure,
properties and applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE, polypropylene,
polyvinyl chloride-compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)

UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of PET,
PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins, polyimides,
PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)

UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses of
phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated polyester
resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.

UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly
(vinyl carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent
polymers- their synthesis, properties and applications

UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-
PP, bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
 Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of various
engineering thermoplastics
 To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering
thermoplastics, thermosetting resins
 Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on polyester,
epoxy, silicone and PU
 To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas
and applications of different biopolymers
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press (2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall (2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd
Edn., CRC press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.
339
OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and specifications.
Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products. Preparation of
test pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers: processability parameters of
rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure rate index, Processability tests
carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk
factor.

UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic
behavior (simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model,
strain recovery and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical
properties, Behavior of reinforced polymers

UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.

UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and
power factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-
efficient, dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties:
transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9

Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies, Flammability
tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
 Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the
polymers.
 To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
 Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
 Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and
elastomers.
340
REFERENCES
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.

OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LTPC

30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks

UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification of
Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .

UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation using
Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).

341
 2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).

REFERENCES
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley 2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O
1 1
3 2
3 3
2 4
2 5
1 6
3 7- 8- 9- 0- 1
2 2
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
C 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
O

CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional
Systems for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable
Systems, Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement
sensors, Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction
force sensor.

UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of
irrelevant information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human
body as a heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests,
Thermopiles.

UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.

342
UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9
Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive Inks.Case study-
smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9
Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
TOTAL PERIODS:45
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system

TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012
REFERENCES
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1

CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

30 03
Preamble:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize the
acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.

343
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9
Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues ,
Computer based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information system,
Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical Informatics,
Bioinformatics

UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and
planning, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.

UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9

Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR, Development
tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical information system,
Computerized prescriptions for patients.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of
CMD, Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model,
semantic networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill
patients, Computer aids for the handicapped.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health- Medical
education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
2. Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
3. Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
4. Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
5. Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,2005

REFERENCES:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
344
OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC
3 003
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9
Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic wastes -
Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged fermentation – Batch
and continous fermentation

UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from biomass –
Plant biomass for industrial application

UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark and
photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production - Single
stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production - Enzymatic
hydrolysis technologies

UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of
Amylases - Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases

UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in composting
- Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting, Fundamentals of
composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems – Nonreactor Composting,
Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
1. To learn the various methods biological treatment
2. To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
3. To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
4. To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
5. To produce the biocompost from wastes
6. To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products

TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using Fungal
Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A Practical
Handbook”, CRC Press,

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural
Waste and By-Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of Waste
Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’, Second
Edition, CRC Press, 2014
345
OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC
3 003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical activity,
illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, cancer;
Prevention – Diet and exercise.

UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus;
Causes Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment

UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse -–
Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac rehabilitation

UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric and
adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI

UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking –
Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep
Publications, 2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017

REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008

OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
1. Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
2. Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases

UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing Concepts of
Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public Health, Determinants
of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education, Genetics, Food and Nutrition).
Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different disciplines in Public Health.

UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9

Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis
C, HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus,
atherosclerosis, fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer
346
UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9
History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and
killed vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in seed
lot systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.

UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric,
neonatal units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology,
Gastroenterology, Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.

UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy –
Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1.To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
2. To learn the various sources of Finance
3. To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
4. To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
5. To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9

Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.

UNIT II .SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features – Merits
and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts, Commercial Papers,
Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc

347
UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9
Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital
Budgeting -– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves -
Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure – determinants
of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure .
Dividend policy - Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy

UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -
Determinants of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives and
Strategies of Cash Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd

REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011

CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
2. Explain how to Value bonds and equities
3. Explain the various approaches to value securities
4. Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
5. Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.

UNIT I THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of
Taxes andInflationonreturn.

UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES 9

Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.

UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS 9

Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis,
dividend capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.

UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES 9

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India

348
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION 9
Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their redressal
system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill education,
5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill Education
(India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019

CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key Regulations
in Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer - Retail & Wholesale
Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.

UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments – Cheques,
Bills of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and Liability
Management – NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities market

UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-
money –forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India –
RBI’s Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s
Initiative.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC –– Leasing
and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –factoring –
Merchant Banking

UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –IRDA –
Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy – revival –
settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.

349
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017

CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of blockchain
and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus: Consensus mechanism -
Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain. Decentralization: Decentralization
using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to decentralization- Blockchain and full
ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts - Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for
decentralization.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9

Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and Payments –
Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name coin – Prime coin
– Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts on a blockchain

UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions
and messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine
(EVM), Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net - Starting up
the private network

UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks –
Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed
Ledger – Corda.

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other Challenges –
Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization, and
Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition, 2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”, VPT,
2017.

CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT P C

3003
UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9
Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and Digital
Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block chain,
Artificial Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS Systems,
Immediate Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface (UPI).Legal and
Regulatory Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their regulations.Digital

350
Payments Smart Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment Gateways, Mobile
Payments, Digital and Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues

UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding, Charity
and Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering

UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech ● IoT and InsurTech ,Risk
Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance Services

UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending: Unique
opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations

UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech, Startups:
Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud detection
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of
technology, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized
Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent Pub,
2016

CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
2. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
3. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
4. To learn the Fintech developments around the world
5. To know about the future of Fintech

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure,
Banking Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future
prospects and potential issues with Fintech.

351
UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9
FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal lending,
P2P lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance, Crowdfunding.

UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry- P2P
insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement through
Quote to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health insurance.

UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth of
FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech companies, The
new financial world.

UNIT V FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services, banking
on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech Supermarket,
Banks partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact on Retail Banking,
A future without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology
Handbook for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking
and the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial service
industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage
Publications, 2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services Paperback,
2018

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L TP C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful
entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting

352
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.

UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9

Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-
Sociological-Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-Basics
of Managing Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations Planning
– Systems Management and Administration

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy- Job
Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs -
Case Studies

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9

Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO
Entrepreneurship – Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global perspectives.
TOTAL45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO 3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO 4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO 5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship

TEXT BOOKS:
1) S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,
2021.
2) Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published
2019 by Cengage Learning,
REFERENCES :
1) Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2) Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and
Survival of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and
Frank Lasch. Wiley Pub.
3) Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4) David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5) HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED-
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6) JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2009
7) Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc;
M. Barcelon, UP
8) Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship

353
CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business
efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9

Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams -
Self Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.

UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building
High-Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team
Building at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation -
Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .

UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and
Transformational Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in
Organisational Leadership.

UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership -
Motivation and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management -
Negotiation and Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in
Leadership.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO 2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
CO 4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO 5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’

REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of
experience ,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).

354
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).

CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.

UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities-
Quality of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative
Environment- Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.

UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity
Training--Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our
creativity – Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities- Strategies
for Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.

UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product Innovation
and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics of Innovation
in Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and Innovation-
Innovation as Collective Change-Innovation as a system

UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial
Opportunities- Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit

UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO 3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO 4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO 5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively

355
Suggested Readings:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House,
2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj
Echambadi.

CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
 To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
 To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies
and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of Marketing
- Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern Components of the Mix
- The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.

UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9

Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and
Macro Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of
Environment Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing
Information System, Types and Components.

UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9

Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product
Strategies - Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and
Branding - Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions -
Cost Based Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National
and Global Pricing.

UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity -
Personal Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-
Logistics Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.

UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business

356
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services
Marketing - E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to :
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO 2 Understand the marketing environment
CO 3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO 4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO 5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing
issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second edition,
2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy &
S.Namakumari, Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.

CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
2. To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource department.
3.To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9

Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager
Roles- Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting -
HR Audit - Challenges in HRM.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job rotation-
Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer Applications in HR -
Recent Trends

UNIT IIII RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9

Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.

UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health and
Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices

357
UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9
Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal
Methods – Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment -
Union Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO 1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO 2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO 3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.

REFERENCES
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012

CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.

UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9

Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9

Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope –
Types - Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of
funds – Mix of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.

UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9

Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based Credit
Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.

358
UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9
Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.

UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9

Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds -
Seed Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO 2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO 3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO 4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO 5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.

REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda,
Eds., John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need
To Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital
Creates New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.

VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3 003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration

UNIT-II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration
359
UNIT-III (9)
1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach

UNIT-IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs

UNIT-V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCEs:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance, New
Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.

CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly

UNIT-II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy

UNIT-III (9)
1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court

UNIT-IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court

UNIT-V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
360
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi

CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems

UNIT-II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.

UNIT-III (9)
1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion

UNIT-IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission

UNIT-V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration

UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory

UNIT III (9)

361
Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics, Organizational
Design.

UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional and
Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making

UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)

CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3 00 3
UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities: Finance
Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller and Auditor
General of India, Attorney General of India

UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government

UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th Constitutional
Amendment Act 1992

UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration

UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India

CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.

362
UNIT-II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model

UNIT-III (9)
Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –
Policy Evaluation.

UNIT-IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and
Role of Political Parties.

UNIT-V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy –
Agriculture policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers,
2016.

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.

UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.

UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9

Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.

UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.

UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
363
 TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
 To understand and solve business problems
 To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
 To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
 To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition
2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James
J.Cochran, Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia,
Singapore, 2016.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.

CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES :
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.

UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures

UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
2. Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
3. Apply various prediction techniques.
4. Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
5. Develop and implement machine learning algorithms

REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann
Publishers 2006
364
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.

CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned
with the overall business strategy.
 To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business –
HR metrics and KPIs.

UNIT II - HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.

UNIT III - HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally
trained -Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.

UNIT IV - HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover-
grades, performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics:
Promotion index - Rotation index - Career path index.

UNIT V - HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling
- Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
365
  The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.

REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and
Applications, SAGE Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize
Your Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.

CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media

UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis

UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9

History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using
Social Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages-
Linking Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.

UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.

UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.

UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic
analysis, online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.

366
REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private
Limited, 2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016

CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and
methods in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the
latest developments in the field.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics,
transforming supply chains.

UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.

UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and
LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.

UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling
Algorithms.

UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of
certainty, risk and uncertainty.

REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time:
Supply Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.

367
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in
Operations/Supply Chain Management , I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.

CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.

UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.

UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.

UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial
model for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.

UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.

UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9

Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.

REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep
2017 by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.

368
 VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.

UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9

Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA),
Land acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost
effectiveness Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic,
demand, political, socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of
Infrastructure Projects to mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple
Stakeholders on Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash
detection in construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and
real time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data
management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective
logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and
Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast
concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9

Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering -
Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines,
Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization,
rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis
framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication
of Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations –
Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA,
Thermodynamic LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension, social dimension - Life cycle
costing (LCC) - Combining LCA and LCC – Case studies

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and

369
 Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for
Infrastructure projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity
Building and Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure
Management Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data
Analytics and Cloud Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth
Generation (5G) Network services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition ,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life
Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2

370
CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT L T P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of
sustainable agricultural systems for a changing world.

UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE

CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes -
Ecological services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems -
Defining sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between
regenerative and sustainable agriculture systems

UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and
disease control

UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity
of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use

UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials
produced using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable
agriculture

UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9

Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem

REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020

371
 2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer,
2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC
Press, 2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014

CO – PO Mapping - SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE PRACTICES

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3

1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its
applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9

Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous
materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties
and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response
to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials

UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -
Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -
Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for
medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes
and their biological applications

UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon-
Calcium phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical
372
Composites-Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix
Composite (MMC)–glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds

UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface
properties of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants
– biological tolerance of implant metals

UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of
nanosize-nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-
Nanosurface and coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics-
BioNEMs -Biosensor-Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
 Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
 Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite
materials
 Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
 Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical
applications.

REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to
Biomaterials Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press,
2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood
head publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.

CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic
application

373
  To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for
sustainable electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available
materials – Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear
energy

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary
battery (Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel
Metal Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery
(Anode materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium
Titanate) (Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery
(ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate based)

UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells,
alkaline fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells,
solid oxide fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel
utilization – electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts (
Platinum, Platinum alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum
catalysts) – Anatomy of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current
conductors, bipolar plates and monopolar plates).

UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si
and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar
cells – multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators
– Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite
solar cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells (
metallic oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-
dimensional Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-
phthalocyanine and perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine-
tin (II) phthalocyanine)

UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble
metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon
fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite-
conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes
(carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs
composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides,
carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
 Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.

374
  Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
 Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
 The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials

REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J.
Skinner, Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold
Lamm, Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia
Forouzandeh, Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.

CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and
other green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.

UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of
waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.

UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as
a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical
methods, microwave-assisted reactions

UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention

375
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5 – To understand advanced technology in green synthesis

TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC,2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley publications,2008

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017

CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 to understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants
generated due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the
purpose of environmental risk assessment.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.

UNIT II MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.

UNIT III ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage;
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements;
analysis of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon
monoxide, hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for environmental analysis

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT9

Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.

376
UNIT V AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9
Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory
overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know

CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.

CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability
of the environment.
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild
wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc

REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.

Course Articulation Matrix

Course Program Outcomes

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1

377
CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
2. To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
3. Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
4. Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
5. Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development

UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security
UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization
and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.

UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind,
Hydro, Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits

UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority
- National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE
integration, Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix
TOTAL: 45 PREIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
2. Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
3. Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
4. Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
5. Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
378
 7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy

CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental
implications of energy utilisation
2. To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
3. To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
4. To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
5. To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage
UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP
UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9
Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy
costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy
audit instruments

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid
Heaters. Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator,
regenerator, heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and
thermocompression
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9
Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination
systems and cooling towers

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the prevailing energy scenario
2. Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
3. Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
4. Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
5. Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
379
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.

380